二、释义之注释显示巴利原文
2. Niddesavaṇṇanā
一、单一释义之注释显示巴利原文
1. Ekakaniddesavaṇṇanā
1 现在,为了从起始处开始,对已建立的论母进行分别显示,而说:“什么是时解脱者?”等。在此,“idha”是指在此众生世间。“ekacco puggalo”是指某一个人。“kālena kālaṃ”中,应依处格来理解其义,即说为“在每一个时机”。“samayena samayaṃ”是前者的同义词。“八解脱”是指色界与无色界的八种等至。因为它们从对立之法中解脱,故得名为“解脱”。“以身”是指与解脱俱生的名身。“触证而住”是指获得后而安住。那么,他在何时触证解脱而住呢?对于想要入等至者,确实有时机,也有非时机。其中,清晨照料身体的时间、执行义务的时间,称为入等至的非时机。但是,在照料身体、执行义务之后,进入住处坐下,直到乞食的时间尚未到来,这期间称为入等至的时机。显示巴利原文
1. Idāni yathāṭhapitaṃ mātikaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya vibhajitvā dassetuṃ – katamo ca puggalo samayavimuttotiādimāha. Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ sattaloke. Ekacco puggaloti eko puggalo. Kālena kālanti ettha bhummavasena attho veditabbo. Ekekasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Samayena samayanti idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Aṭṭha vimokkheti rūpāvacarārūpāvacaraaṭṭhasamāpattiyo. Tāsañhi paccanīkadhammehi vimuccanato vimokkhoti nāmaṃ. Kāyenāti vimokkhasahajātena nāmakāyena. Phusitvā viharatīti paṭilabhitvā iriyati. Katamasmiṃ panesa kāle vimokkhe phusitvā viharatīti? Samāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmassa hi kālo nāma atthi, akālo nāma atthi. Tattha pātova sarīrapaṭijagganakālo, vattakaraṇakālo ca samāpajjanassa akālo nāma. Sarīraṃ pana paṭijaggitvā vattaṃ katvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā nisinnassa yāva piṇḍāya gamanakālo nāgacchati, etasmiṃ antare samāpajjanassa kālo nāma.
然而,当觉察乞食的时间而外出后,礼敬佛塔的时间、在比丘僧众围绕下于思惟处站立的时间、前往乞食的时间、在村落中行走的时间、在食堂喝粥的时间、履行义务的时间——这些也都是入等至的非时。但是,若食堂有僻静之处,直到用餐时间尚未到来,这期间也是入等至的时。而用餐的时间、返回寺院的时间、收拾钵与衣的时间、履行白昼义务的时间、给予问询的时间,这些也是入等至的非时。所谓非时,即是不适当的时机。除去所有那些,在其余的时间、适当的时机,以俱生的名身获得并安住于前述的八解脱,即被称为“在此,有某一个人……而住”。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍāya gamanakālaṃ pana sallakkhetvā nikkhantassa cetiyavandanakālo, bhikkhusaṅghaparivutassa vitakkamāḷake ṭhānakālo piṇḍāya gamanakālo gāme caraṇakālo; āsanasālāya yāgupānakālo vattakaraṇakāloti ayampi samāpajjanassa akālo nāma. Āsanasālāya pana vivitte okāse sati yāva bhattakālo nāgacchati, etasmimpi antare samāpajjanassa kālo nāma. Bhattaṃ pana bhuñjanakālo, vihāragamanakālo, pattacīvarapaṭisāmanakālo, divāvattakaraṇakālo, paripucchādānakāloti ayampi samāpajjanassa akālo nāma. Yo akālo, sveva asamayo. Taṃ sabbampi ṭhapetvā avasese kāle kāle, samaye samaye vuttappakāre aṭṭha vimokkhe sahajātanāmakāyena paṭilabhitvā viharanto, ‘‘idhekacco puggalo…pe… viharatī’’ti vuccati.
又,他以俱生的名法触证与之俱生的诸法,以近行触证安止,以前一安止触证后一安止。因为,与某法俱生的那些法,即依彼而获得;以触来说,也称为已被触证。近行是获得安止的因,同样,前一安止也是后一安止的因。在此,应如此了知通过俱生法对于俱生法的触证:初禅以寻等五支为五分。除去这些支,其余超过五十的法,称为四蕴。以那名身,触证、获得初禅等至解脱而住。第二禅以喜、乐、心一境性为三分,第三禅以乐、心一境性为二分,第四禅以舍、心一境性为二分;同样,空无边处……乃至非想非非想处。除去那些支,其余超过五十的法,称为四蕴。以那名身,触证、获得非想非非想处等至解脱而住。显示巴利原文
Apicesa saphassakehi sahajātanāmadhammehi sahajātadhamme phusatiyeva nāma, upacārena appanaṃ phusatiyeva nāma. Purimāya appanāya aparaṃ appanaṃ phusatiyeva. Yena hi saddhiṃ ye dhammā sahajātā, tena te paṭiladdhā nāma honti. Phassenāpi phuṭṭhāyeva nāma honti. Upacārampi appanāya paṭilābhakāraṇameva, tathā purimā appanā aparaappanāya. Tatrāssa evaṃ sahajātehi sahajātānaṃ phusanā veditabbā – paṭhamajjhānañhi vitakkādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ. Tasmiṃ ṭhapetvā tāni aṅgāni sesā atirekapaṇṇāsadhammā cattāro khandhā nāma honti. Tena nāmakāyena paṭhamajjhānasamāpattivimokkhaṃ phusitvā paṭilabhitvā viharati. Dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ pītisukhacittekaggatāhi tivaṅgikaṃ, tatiyaṃ sukhacittekaggatāhi duvaṅgikaṃ, catutthaṃ upekkhācittekaggatāhi duvaṅgikaṃ, tathā ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanañca. Tattha ṭhapetvā tāni aṅgāni sesā atirekapaṇṇāsadhammā cattāro khandhā nāma honti. Tena nāmakāyena nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattivimokkhaṃ phusitvā paṭilabhitvā viharati.
“以慧见”是指以观慧照见诸行,以道慧照见四谛法。“某些漏已灭尽”是指各各灭尽,即初道等所应断的漏已灭尽。此人被称为“时解脱者”。在此,获得八等至的凡夫也可称为以那名身触证而住,但圣典中说“某些漏已灭尽”,而凡夫并无已灭尽的漏,因此他不被包含。获得八等至的漏尽者也可称为以那名身触证而住,但他没有尚未灭尽的漏,因此也不被包含。应知“时解脱者”只是三种有学的名称——须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含。显示巴利原文
Paññāya cassa disvāti vipassanāpaññāya saṅkhāragataṃ, maggapaññāya catusaccadhamme passitvā. Ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā hontīti upaḍḍhupaḍḍhā paṭhamamaggādivajjhā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samayavimuttoti ettha aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī puthujjano tena nāmakāyena phusitvā viharatīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Puthujjanassa ca khīṇā āsavā nāma natthi, tasmā so na gahito. Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī khīṇāsavopi tena nāmakāyena phusitvā viharatīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tassa pana aparikkhīṇāsavā nāma natthi, tasmā sopi na gahito. Samayavimuttoti pana tiṇṇaṃ sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmīnaṃyevetaṃ nāmanti veditabbaṃ.
2 二、非时解脱释义——应以与前面类似的方法了知。在此,“非时解脱者”是干观漏尽者的名称。然而,干观者、须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含、获得八等至的漏尽者以及凡夫,在这二法之中不被收摄,他们被称为二法之外的补特伽罗。因此,导师以自己佛陀的善觉悟,将下方已摄与未摄者集合起来,连同后颂一起纳入教法,而说“一切圣者”等。在此,“圣解脱”是指由于远离烦恼而被称为“圣”的出世间解脱。这是说:对于进入外部的八等至者,有时机,也有非时机;对于以道解脱而解脱者,则无时机或非时机。对于信心强盛、观已发起的行者,无论行走、站立、坐着、躺卧、咀嚼、进食,无不证得道果。如此,对于以道解脱而解脱者,无时机或非时机,法王将下方已摄与未摄者集合起来,连同此后颂一起纳入教法。获得等至的凡夫,在此教法中也不被包含。然而,若此人被亲近,则可依由等至所镇伏的烦恼而亲近时解脱的状态。显示巴利原文
2. Asamayavimuttaniddese – purimasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Asamayavimuttoti panettha sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sukkhavipassakā pana sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino ca khīṇāsavā puthujjanā ca imasmiṃ duke na labbhanti, dukamuttakapuggalā nāma honti. Tasmā satthā attano buddhasubuddhatāya heṭṭhā gahite ca aggahite ca saṅkaḍḍhitvā saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakehi tantiṃ āropento sabbepi ariyapuggalātiādimāha. Tattha ariye vimokkheti kilesehi ārakattā ariyeti saṅkhaṃ gate lokuttaravimokkhe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bāhirānañhi aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ samāpajjantassa samayopi atthi asamayopi. Maggavimokkhena vimuccanassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthi. Yassa saddhā balavatī, vipassanā ca āraddhā, tassa gacchantassa tiṭṭhantassa nisīdantassa nipajjantassa khādantassa bhuñjantassa maggaphalapaṭivedho nāma na hotīti natthi. Iti maggavimokkhena vimuccanassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthīti heṭṭhā gahite ca aggahite ca saṅkaḍḍhitvā imaṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakaṃ tantiṃ āropesi dhammarājā. Samāpattilābhī puthujjano imāyapi tantiyā aggahitova. Bhajāpiyamāno pana samāpattivikkhambhitānaṃ kilesānaṃ vasena samayavimuttabhāvaṃ bhajeyya.
3 三、坏法与不坏法的解说中——凡已证得的等至法会坏灭、消失者,即称为坏法。‘与色俱行的’:即与称为色相的色俱行。意思是:与彼一同生起、不离色所缘的四种色界禅那。‘与无色俱行的’:即与色相异、非色的,称为无色。意思是:与无色俱行、与彼一同生起、不离无色所缘的四种无色界禅那。‘非随意获得者’:因未能以五种方式熟练自在,故不能如愿获得,称为非随意获得者,即等至不纯熟者。‘非无苦获得者’:即苦获得者、难获得者。凡是修习时,须镇伏烦恼、达到近行、达到安止、获得心之匣,唯有以苦、以难、以功用、以策励、经劳顿方能证得彼成就者,即名为非无苦获得者。‘非无艰难获得者’:即不广大获得者,不能令等至持续长久。意思是:仅生起一、二个心识刹那后便迅速出定。显示巴利原文
3. Kuppadhammākuppadhammaniddesesu – yassa adhigato samāpattidhammo kuppati nassati, so kuppadhammo. Rūpasahagatānanti rūpanimittasaṅkhātena rūpena sahagatānaṃ. Tena saddhiṃ pavattānaṃ na vinā rūpārammaṇānaṃ catunnaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānanti attho. Arūpasahagatānanti rūpato aññaṃ, na rūpanti arūpaṃ. Arūpena sahagatānaṃ tena saddhiṃ pavattānaṃ na vinā arūpārammaṇānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpāvacarajjhānānanti attho. Na nikāmalābhīti pañcahākārehi aciṇṇavasitāya icchitākārena aladdhattā na nikāmalābhī. Appaguṇasamāpattikoti attho. Na akicchalābhīti kicchalābhī dukkhalābhī. Yo āgamanamhi kilese vikkhambhento upacāraṃ pāpento appanaṃ pāpento cittamañjūsaṃ labhanto dukkhena kicchena sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilamanto taṃ sampadaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkoti, so na akicchalābhī nāma. Na akasiralābhīti avipulalābhī. Samāpattiṃ appetvā addhānaṃ pharituṃ na sakkoti. Ekaṃ dve cittavāre vattetvā sahasāva vuṭṭhātīti attho.
‘于所欲之处’:即希欲入等至后,坐于某处。‘于所欲之等至’:即希欲入于遍禅、或入出息念禅、或梵住禅、或不净禅等任何一种等至中安坐。‘于所欲之时’:即依时间限定而希望住于某段时间。此即所说:无论于何处、无论何种等至、无论多长时间,希望入定或出定,皆不能于彼处、他们至、彼时间随意入定或出定。或瞻望月亮、太阳后,心中限定:‘待此月亮或太阳运行至某处时,我便出定。’如此入禅那者,却不能如所限定而出定,于中途便出定;此乃等至不纯熟之故。显示巴利原文
Yatthicchakanti yasmiṃ okāse samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdituṃ icchati. Yadicchakanti kasiṇajjhānaṃ vā ānāpānajjhānaṃ vā brahmavihārajjhānaṃ vā asubhajjhānaṃ vāti yaṃ yaṃ samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdituṃ icchati. Yāvaticchakanti addhānaparicchedena yattakaṃ kālaṃ icchati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yattha yattha yaṃ yaṃ samāpattiṃ yattakaṃ addhānaṃ samāpajjitumpi vuṭṭhātumpi icchati, tattha tattha taṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ tattakaṃ addhānaṃ samāpajjitumpi vuṭṭhātumpi na sakkoti. Candaṃ vā sūriyaṃ vā ulloketvā ‘imasmiṃ cande vā sūriye vā ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gate vuṭṭhahissāmī’ti paricchinditvā jhānaṃ samāpanno yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, antarāva vuṭṭhāti; samāpattiyā appaguṇatāyāti.
‘由于放逸’:即缘于放逸。‘此被称为’:即如此种类之人称为坏法者。然则,此乃获得八等至的凡夫、须陀洹、斯陀含这三种人的名称。因为他们的定障与观障之法未被善加镇伏、未被善加清除,故他们的等至会消失、退失。而且,这并非因为破戒,亦非因为违犯过失。然而,此并非重大解脱法,不会因些许应作之事或仅违背义务而消失。显示巴利原文
Pamādamāgammāti pamādaṃ paṭicca. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evaṃvidho puggalo kuppadhammoti vuccati. Idaṃ pana aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino puthujjanassa sotāpannassa sakadāgāminoti tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ. Etesañhi samādhipāribandhakā vipassanāpāribandhakā ca dhammā na suvikkhambhitā, na suvikkhālitā, tena tesaṃ samāpatti nassati parihāyati. Sā ca kho neva sīlabhedena, nāpattivītikkamena. Na garukamokkhadhammo panesa appamattakenapi kiccakaraṇīyena vā vattabhedamattakena vā nassati.
在此举一事例:据说,有一位长老能入等至。当他入村托钵时,孩童们在寺院内玩耍后离去。长老归来,默念“应当清扫寺院”,却未付诸行动便径直进入精舍,坐下心想:“我将入等至。”然而,他无法入等至,便思惟:“有何障碍?”他审察戒律,未见丝毫违犯;又省察:“是否有义务上的违犯?”待察觉寺院尚未清扫,便先行清扫,之后进入精舍坐下,随即入等至而安住。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira thero samāpattiṃ vaḷañjeti. Tasmiṃ piṇḍāya gāmaṃ paviṭṭhe dārakā pariveṇe kīḷitvā pakkamiṃsu. Thero āgantvā ‘pariveṇaṃ sammajjitabba’nti cintetvā asammajjitvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘samāpattiṃ appessāmī’ti nisīdi. So appetuṃ asakkonto, ‘kiṃ nu kho āvaraṇa’nti sīlaṃ āvajjanto appamattakampi vītikkamaṃ adisvā ‘vattabhedo nu kho atthī’ti olokento pariveṇassa asammaṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñatvā sammajjitvā pavisitvā nisīdanto samāpattiṃ appentova nisīdi.
4 四、不坏法的解说,应依其对立面来理解。而“不坏法”一名,是指获得八等至的阿那含与漏尽者这二者的称呼。因为他们的定障与观障,已被善加镇伏、善加清除;因此,他们即使忙于谈笑、喜群聚等事务,或以其他任何适合自身的放逸方式度日,等至也不会损坏、不会消失。然而,纯观行者中的须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含、漏尽者,则不在此对论之列;他们被称为对论之外的人。因此,大师以自觉悟之智,将前已摄受及未摄受者汇集在一起,于此对论中连同“背转者”一同纳入教说,而宣说“一切圣者”等语。因八等至的坏灭或许会有,而出世间法一旦证悟,则绝无坏灭可言,故有此说。显示巴利原文
4. Akuppadhammaniddeso vuttapaṭipakkhavaseneva veditabbo. Akuppadhammoti idaṃ pana aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino anāgāmissa ceva khīṇāsavassa cāti dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ. Tesañhi samādhipāribandhakā vipassanāpāribandhakā ca dhammā suvikkhambhitā suvikkhālitā; tena tesaṃ bhassasaṅgaṇikārāmādikiccena vā aññena vā yena kenaci attano anurūpena pamādena vītināmentānampi samāpatti na kuppati, na nassati. Sukkhavipassakā pana sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmikhīṇāsavā imasmiṃ duke na labbhanti; dukamuttakapuggalā nāma honti. Tasmā satthā attano buddhasubuddhatāya heṭṭhā gahite ca aggahite ca saṅkaḍḍhitvā imasmimpi duke saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakehi tantiṃ āropento sabbepi ariyapuggalātiādimāha. Aṭṭhannañhi samāpattīnaṃ kuppanaṃ nassanaṃ bhaveyya, lokuttaradhammassa pana sakiṃ paṭividdhassa kuppanaṃ nassanaṃ nāma natthi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
5 五、退法与不退法的解说,亦应依照坏法与不坏法的解说来了知。只是在此处,是依于人的放逸,来把握法的退失与不退失,这仅仅是异门说示的差别而已。其余一切处,皆与此理相同。显示巴利原文
5. Parihānadhammāparihānadhammaniddesāpi kuppadhammākuppadhammaniddesavaseneva veditabbā. Kevalañhi idha puggalassa pamādaṃ paṭicca dhammānaṃ parihānampi aparihānampi gahitanti idaṃ pariyāyadesanāmattameva nānaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha tādisameva.
7 七、思能者的解说——'思能者':指能使思不遭退失者。'若更思惟':即若入等至。因为入等至者,即名更思惟。他则不会退失,其他则退失。显示巴利原文
7. Cetanābhabbaniddese – cetanābhabboti cetanāya aparihāniṃ āpajjituṃ bhabbo. Sace anusañcetetīti, sace samāpajjati. Samāpattiñhi samāpajjanto anusañceteti nāma. So na parihāyati, itaro parihāyati.
8 八、护能者的解说——'护能者':指能使护不遭退失者。'若护':即若舍弃非饶益法、修习饶益法而入等至。如此行道者,即名护。他则不会退失,其他则退失。显示巴利原文
8. Anurakkhaṇābhabbaniddese – anurakkhaṇābhabboti anurakkhaṇāya aparihāniṃ āpajjituṃ bhabbo. Sace anurakkhatīti sace anupakāradhamme pahāya upakāradhamme sevanto samāpajjati. Evañhi paṭipajjanto anurakkhati nāma. So na parihāyati, itaro parihāyati.
这两者皆能令等至安立、稳固。然而,护能者比思能者更为强大。因为思能者不了知饶益与非饶益法。由于不了知,便排斥、摒除饶益法,而修习非饶益法。他因修习这些法而从等至退失。护能者则了知饶益与非饶益法。由于了知,便排斥、摒除非饶益法,而修习饶益法。他因修习这些法而不从等至退失。显示巴利原文
Ime dvepi samāpattiṃ ṭhapetuṃ thāvaraṃ kātuṃ paṭibalā. Cetanābhabbato pana anurakkhaṇābhabbova balavataro. Cetanābhabbo hi upakārānupakāre dhamme na jānāti. Ajānanto upakāradhamme nudati nīharati, anupakāradhamme sevati. So te sevanto samāpattito parihāyati . Anurakkhaṇābhabbo upakārānupakāre dhamme jānāti. Jānanto anupakāradhamme nudati nīharati, upakāradhamme sevati. So te sevanto samāpattito na parihāyati.
正如两位田地的守护者,一位患有黄疸病,不能忍受寒冷等,另一位无病,能忍受寒冷等。有病的那位不下到低处的茅舍,放弃了夜间与白天的守护。白天,鹦鹉、孔雀等进入田地啄食稻穗;夜晚,鹿、猪等进入,如同碾切打谷场一般,破坏后离去。他由于放逸,最终连种子量也得不到。另一位不放弃夜间与白天的守护,由于不放逸,从一卡利沙的田地获得四车乃至八车的收成。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi dve khettapālā eko paṇḍurogena sarogo akkhamo sītādīnaṃ, eko arogo sītādīnaṃ saho. Sarogo heṭṭhākuṭiṃ na otarati, rattārakkhaṃ divārakkhaṃ vijahati. Tassa divā sukamorādayo khettaṃ otaritvā sālisīsaṃ khādanti, rattiṃ migasūkarādayo pavisitvā khalaṃ tacchi taṃ viya chetvā gacchanti. So attano pamattakāraṇā puna bījamattampi na labhati. Itaro rattārakkhaṃ divārakkhaṃ na vijahati. So attano appamattakāraṇā ekakarīsato cattāripi aṭṭhapi sakaṭāni labhati.
其中,有病的田地守护者,当知如同思不能者;无病的守护者,当知如同护持不能者。就像有病的守护者由于放逸,连种子量也得不到;同样,思不能者由于不了知有益与无益之法,舍弃有益而亲近无益,其等至便会退失。而另一位守护者由于不放逸,从仅仅一卡利沙的田地便获得四车乃至八车的收成;同样,护持不能者由于了知有益与无益之法,舍弃无益而亲近有益,其等至便不会退失。应当这样了知:如是,相较于思不能者,护持不能者更能令等至稳固,更具力量。显示巴利原文
Tattha sarogakhettapālo viya cetanābhabbo, arogo viya anurakkhaṇābhabbo daṭṭhabbo. Sarogassa attano pamādena puna bījamattassapi alabhanaṃ viya cetanābhabbassa upakārānupakāre dhamme ajānitvā upakāre pahāya anupakāre sevantassa samāpattiyā parihānaṃ. Itarassa attano appamādena ekakarīsamattato catuaṭṭhasakaṭauddharaṇaṃ viya anurakkhaṇābhabbassa upakārānupakāre dhamme jānitvā anupakāre pahāya upakāre sevantassa samāpattiyā aparihānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ cetanābhabbato anurakkhaṇābhabbova samāpattiṃ thāvaraṃ kātuṃ balavataroti veditabbo.
9 第九、凡夫解说中:‘三结’即见结、戒禁取结、疑结。因为这些结在果位刹那才称为断除。而此人在果位刹那亦无此状态,故显示其非圣者。‘那些法’即指那些结法。因为在道位刹那,才称为为了断除那些结法而行道。而此人在道位刹那亦无此状态。应知至此,所说乃舍弃业处的愚钝凡夫。显示巴利原文
9. Puthujjananiddese – tīṇi saṃyojanānīti diṭṭhisaṃyojanasīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanavicikicchāsaṃyojanāni. Etāni hi phalakkhaṇe pahīnāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ pana phalakkhaṇepi na hotīti dasseti. Tesaṃ dhammānanti tesaṃ saṃyojanadhammānaṃ. Maggakkhaṇasmiñhi tesaṃ pahānāya paṭipanno nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana maggakkhaṇepi na hoti. Ettāvatā vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhāno thūlabālaputhujjanova idha kathitoti veditabbo.
10 十、种姓者解说中——‘那些法’指与种姓智一同生起的五十余种善法。‘圣法’指出世间道。‘进入’即趣入、生起、显现。‘称为’:此缘取涅槃之智,超越一切凡夫称谓、凡夫种姓、凡夫范围、凡夫施设,而进入圣者称谓、圣者种姓、圣者范围、圣者施设,故称为种姓者。显示巴利原文
10. Gotrabhuniddese – yesaṃ dhammānanti yesaṃ gotrabhuñāṇena saddhiṃ uppannānaṃ paropaṇṇāsakusaladhammānaṃ. Ariyadhammassāti lokuttaramaggassa. Avakkanti hotīti okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ nibbānārammaṇena ñāṇena sabbaṃ puthujjanasaṅkhaṃ puthujjanagottaṃ puthujjanamaṇḍalaṃ puthujjanapaññattiṃ atikkamitvā ariyasaṅkhaṃ ariyagottaṃ ariyamaṇḍalaṃ ariyapaññattiṃ okkamanato gotrabhūpuggalo nāma vuccati.
11 十一、怖畏止息者解说中——因怖畏而止息,故为怖畏止息者。七种有学及凡夫因畏怖而远离恶,不造恶。其中,凡夫畏惧四种怖畏:恶趣怖、轮回怖、烦恼怖、讥嫌怖。此中,从应畏惧的意义上说,恶趣本身即是怖畏,故称恶趣怖。其余三者同理。其中,凡夫畏惧恶趣怖,思惟:‘若你造恶,四恶道犹如张口而立的饥饿蟒蛇,于其中领受苦痛,你将如何?’因此不造恶。而无始轮回本身即是轮回怖。一切不善即是烦恼怖。指责即是讥嫌怖。凡夫亦因畏惧这些而不造恶。然而,须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含三位有学,因已超越恶趣,故畏惧其余三种怖畏而不造恶。处于道位的诸有学,或因未来趋向,或因怖畏未彻底断除,而称为怖畏止息者。漏尽者于四种怖畏中一无所惧。因其怖畏已彻底断除,故称无怖畏止息者。然而,他难道不畏惧讥嫌吗?不畏惧。但可以说他防护讥嫌。如同多努花池村的漏尽者长老。显示巴利原文
11. Bhayūparataniddese – bhayena uparatoti bhayūparato. Sattapi sekkhā puthujjanā ca bhāyitvā pāpato oramanti pāpaṃ na karonti . Tattha puthujjanā duggatibhayaṃ, vaṭṭabhayaṃ, kilesabhayaṃ, upavādabhayanti cattāri bhayāni bhāyanti. Tesu bhāyitabbaṭṭhena duggatiyeva bhayaṃ duggatibhayaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tattha puthujjano ‘sace tvaṃ pāpaṃ karissasi, cattāro apāyā mukhaṃ vivaritvā ṭhitacchātaajagarasadisā, tesu dukkhaṃ anubhavanto kathaṃ bhavissasī’ti duggatibhayaṃ bhāyitvā pāpaṃ na karoti. Anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭaṃyeva pana vaṭṭabhayaṃ nāma. Sabbampi akusalaṃ kilesabhayaṃ nāma. Garahā pana upavādabhayaṃ nāma. Tānipi bhāyitvā puthujjano pāpaṃ na karoti. Sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino pana tayo sekkhā duggatiṃ atītattā sesāni tīṇi bhayāni bhāyitvā pāpaṃ na karonti. Maggaṭṭhakasekkhā āgamanavasena vā asamucchinnabhayattā vā bhayūparatā nāma honti. Khīṇāsavo imesu catūsu bhayesu ekampi na bhāyati. So hi sabbaso samucchinnabhayo; tasmā abhayūparatoti vuccati. Kiṃ pana so upavādampi na bhāyatīti? Na bhāyati. Upavādaṃ pana rakkhatīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Doṇuppalavāpigāme khīṇāsavatthero viya.
12 十二、不能入者解说中——不能入于正性决定,故为不能入者。‘业障’指五种无间业。‘烦恼障’指定邪见。‘果报障’指无因、二因的结生。‘无信’指对佛、法、僧无信心。‘无欲’指缺乏修善的意欲。除赡部洲外,其余三洲的居民应知为无欲者,因已堕入无欲的状态。‘劣慧’指缺乏有分慧。‘不能’指未获得道果的资粮。‘决定’指道决定、正性决定。‘入’:不能进入、趣入、安立于诸善法中的正性决定。显示巴利原文
12. Abhabbāgamananiddese – sammattaniyāmāgamanassa abhabboti abhabbāgamano. Kammāvaraṇenāti pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukaduhetukapaṭisandhiyā. Assaddhāti buddhadhammasaṅghesu saddhārahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā. Te ṭhapetvā jambudīpaṃ itaradīpattayavāsino veditabbā. Tesu hi manussā acchandikabhāvaṃ paviṭṭhā nāma. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññārahitā. Abhabbāti appaṭiladdhamaggaphalūpanissayā. Niyāmanti magganiyāmaṃ, sammattaniyāmaṃ. Okkamitunti etaṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattasaṅkhātaṃ niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ pavisituṃ tattha patiṭṭhātuṃ abhabbā.
13 十三、能入者之解说,应依前述相反之理了知。如是,于此二法中,凡五种无间业者、定邪见者、已取无因或二因结生者、不信佛等者、无有欲作之意欲者、有分慧不圆满者、无道果资粮者——这些一切皆不能入于正性决定;相反者,则说为能入。显示巴利原文
13. Bhabbāgamananiddeso vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo. Evamimasmiṃ duke ye ca puggalā pañcānantariyakā, ye ca niyatamicchādiṭṭhikā, yehi ca ahetukaduhetukapaṭisandhi gahitā , ye ca buddhādīnaṃ na saddahanti, yesañca kattukamyatāchando natthi, ye ca aparipuṇṇabhavaṅgapaññā, yesañca maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, te sabbepi sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamituṃ abhabbā, viparītā bhabbāti vuttā.
14 十四、决定与不决定之解说中——‘无间业者’,即具足无间业者。‘邪见者’,即具足定邪见者。这些一切,因定趣地狱,故称决定者。八种圣者,因定趣正性,为证更高道果及无余涅槃,故称决定者。其余众生则无固定趣向。譬如抛向空中的棍杖落地时,不知‘将以顶端、中部还是根部触地’;同样,因无‘将生于某趣’的确定,故应知为不决定者。至于所说北俱卢洲众生有决定之趣向,那并非依决定法而言。唯有具足邪性决定法或正性决定法者,方称决定者。此众生决定说,即是依他们而说。显示巴利原文
14. Niyatāniyataniddese – ānantarikāti āntarikakammasamaṅgino. Micchādiṭṭhikāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhisamaṅgino. Sabbepi hete nirayassa atthāya niyatattā niyatā nāma. Aṭṭha pana ariyapuggalā sammābhāvāya uparūparimaggaphalatthāya ceva anupādāparinibbānatthāya ca niyatattā niyatā nāma. Avasesapuggalā pana anibaddhagatikā. Yathā ākāse khittadaṇḍo pathaviyaṃ patanto ‘aggena vā majjhena vā mūlena vā patissatī’ti na ñāyati; evameva ‘asukagatiyā nāma nibbattissantī’ti niyamābhāvā aniyatā nāmāti veditabbā. Yā pana uttarakurukānaṃ niyatagatikatā vuttā, na sā niyatadhammavasena. Micchattasammattaniyatadhammāyeva hi niyatā nāma. Tesañca vasenāyaṃ puggalaniyamo kathitoti.
15 十五、行道者之释义——‘具道者’即处于道位的八种人。他们为证果而行道,故称行道者。‘具果者’即因具足证得果而称具果者。他们从证果之时起,纵未入果等至,亦仍称住立于果。显示巴利原文
15. Paṭipannakaniddese – maggasamaṅginoti maggaṭṭhakapuggalā. Te hi phalatthāya paṭipannattā paṭipannakā nāma. Phalasamaṅginoti phalapaṭilābhasamaṅgitāya phalasamaṅgino. Phalapaṭilābhato paṭṭhāya hi te phalasamāpattiṃ asamāpannāpi phale ṭhitāyeva nāma.
16 十六、等首者释义——“不先不后”即非前非后,于同一刹那断除之意。“遍尽”即完全灭尽。此人名为等首者。这些首者有三种:威仪等首者、病等首者、命等首者。其中,有人经行中修观,证得阿罗汉后,仍在经行中般涅槃,如红莲长老;有人站立中修观,证得阿罗汉后,仍在站立中般涅槃,如住于拘吒山寺的帝沙长老;有人坐着修观,证得阿罗汉后,仍在坐着中般涅槃;有人躺着修观,证得阿罗汉后,仍在躺着中般涅槃——这称为威仪等首者。显示巴利原文
16. Samasīsīniddese – apubbaṃ acarimanti apure apacchā, ekappahārenevāti attho. Pariyādānanti parikkhayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ puggalo samasīsī nāma vuccati. So panesa tividho hoti – iriyāpathasamasīsī, rogasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsīti. Tattha yo caṅkamantova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā caṅkamantova parinibbāti padumatthero viya; ṭhitakova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā ṭhitakova parinibbāti koṭapabbatavihāravāsītissatthero viya; nisinnova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā nisinnova parinibbāti, nipannova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā nipannova parinibbāti – ayaṃ iriyāpathasamasīsī nāma.
若有人患病,即于病中修观,证得阿罗汉后,便因该病而般涅槃——此人名为病等首者。显示巴利原文
Yo pana ekaṃ rogaṃ patvā antorogeyeva vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā teneva rogena parinibbāti – ayaṃ rogasamasīsī nāma.
什么是命等首者?“首有十三种——障碍首即渴爱,系缚首即慢,执取首即见,散乱首即掉举,杂染首即无明,胜解首即信,策励首即精进,安住首即念,无散乱首即定,见首即慧,转起首即命根,行境首即解脱,行首即灭”(《无碍解道》1.87)。其中,烦恼首即无明,为阿罗汉道所灭尽。转起首即命根,为死心所灭尽。能灭尽无明的心,不能灭尽命根;能灭尽命根的心,不能灭尽无明。灭尽无明的心是一,灭尽命根的心是另一。若此二首的灭尽同时发生,此人便称为命等首者。显示巴利原文
Kataro jīvitasamasīsī nāma? ‘‘Sīsanti terasa sīsāni – palibodhasīsañca taṇhā, vinibandhanasīsañca māno, parāmāsasīsañca diṭṭhi, vikkhepasīsañca uddhaccaṃ, saṃkilesasīsañca avijjā, adhimokkhasīsañca saddhā, paggahasīsañca vīriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānasīsañca sati, avikkhepasīsañca samādhi, dassanasīsañca paññā, pavattasīsañca jīvitindriyaṃ, gocarasīsañca vimokkho, saṅkhārasīsañca nirodho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.87). Tattha kilesasīsaṃ avijjaṃ arahattamaggo pariyādiyati. Pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyati. Avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ avijjaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ, jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ. Yassa cetaṃ sīsadvayaṃ samaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, so jīvitasamasīsī nāma.
如何是同时呢?以刹那之同时。即于道出起的那个刹那——于入流道有五省察,于斯陀含道有五,于阿那含道有五,于阿罗汉道有四,共十九种省察智——安住于省察智后,沉入有分而般涅槃。以此刹那同时,故说此二首的灭尽为同时。因此,此人被称为‘命等首者’。这正是此处所指的含义。显示巴利原文
Kathamidaṃ samaṃ hotīti? Vārasamatāya. Yasmiñhi vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti – sotāpattimagge pañca paccavekkhaṇāni, sakadāgāmimagge pañca, anāgāmimagge pañca, arahattamagge cattārīti ekūnavīsatiyā paccavekkhaṇañāṇe patiṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā parinibbāyati. Imāya vārasamatāya idaṃ ubhayasīsapariyādānaṃ samaṃ hoti nāma. Tenāyaṃ puggalo jīvitasamasīsīti vuccati. Ayameva ca idha adhippeto.
17 十七、住劫者释义——“能令劫住立”者,名为住劫者;具有令劫住立之能力者,名为住劫者。意思是能够使劫停住不动。若有燃烧之时,则应有燃烧的时刻。只要这位具道者尚未证得须陀洹果,劫就还不会燃烧。即使正在燃烧,也会不烧而停住。因为所谓的劫灭,是大变异、大功用,是以百千俱胝轮围世界的燃烧为缘的大世间灭。他说:即使是如此大的灭,也会停住。然而,在教法住世时,这种劫灭是不存在的。在劫灭时,教法则不存在。因为在到达终点之时,才有所谓的劫灭。虽然如此,为了显示没有障碍,导师举出这个理由:“这也可能发生,但对于具道者,果的障碍是绝不可能造成的。”那么,这位住劫者能令劫停住多久呢?于道出起的那个刹那,转向有分之后,意门转向心生起。由此,三随顺心、一种姓心、一道心、二果心、五省察智——能令劫停住如此之久。对于此义,他们也以外来的客喻这样说明:如果在入流道具足者的头顶上方,用三股绳绑着一块一由旬大的整块岩石悬吊着,若断了一股,还以两股吊着;断了两股,还以一股吊着;即使那一股也断了,它也会像云峰一样停在空中,而绝无可能对此人于道之后生起的果造成障碍。显示巴利原文
17. Ṭhitakappīniddese – ṭhito kappoti ṭhitakappo, ṭhitakappo assa atthīti ṭhitakappī. Kappaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthoti attho. Uḍḍayhanavelā assāti jhāyanakālo bhaveyya. Neva tāvāti yāva esa maggasamaṅgī puggalo sotāpattiphalaṃ na sacchikaroti, neva tāva kappo jhāyeyya. Jhāyamānopi ajjhāyitvāva tiṭṭheyya. Kappavināso hi nāma mahāvikāro mahāpayogo koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷassa jhāyanavasena mahālokavināso. Ayampi evaṃ mahāvināso tiṭṭheyya vāti vadati. Sāsane pana dharamāne ayaṃ kappavināso nāma natthi. Kappavināse sāsanaṃ natthi. Gatakoṭike hi kāle kappavināso nāma hoti. Evaṃ santepi satthā antarāyābhāvaṃ dīpetuṃ idaṃ kāraṇaṃ āhari – ‘‘idampi bhaveyya, maggasamaṅgino pana phalassa antarāyo na sakkā kātu’’nti. Ayaṃ pana puggalo kappaṃ ṭhapento kittakaṃ kālaṃ ṭhapeyyāti? Yasmiṃ vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, atha bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭentaṃ manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati. Tato tīṇi anulomāni, ekaṃ gotrabhucittaṃ, ekaṃ maggacittaṃ, dve phalacittāni, pañca paccavekkhaṇañāṇānīti ettakaṃ kālaṃ ṭhapeyya. Imaṃ panatthaṃ bāhirāya āgantukūpamāyapi evaṃ dīpayiṃsu. Sace hi sotāpattimaggasamaṅgissa matthakūpari yojanikaṃ ekagghanaselaṃ tivaṭṭāya rajjuyā bandhitvā olambeyya, ekasmiṃ vaṭṭe chinne dvīhi olambeyya, dvīsu chinnesu ekena olambeyyeva, tasmimpi chinne abbhakūṭaṃ viya ākāse tiṭṭheyya, na tveva tassa puggalassa maggānantaraphalassa antarāyaṃ kareyyāti. Ayaṃ pana dīpanā parittā, purimāva mahantā. Na kevalaṃ pana sotāpattimaggaṭṭhova kappaṃ ṭhapeti, itare maggasamaṅginopi ṭhapentiyeva. Tena bhagavā heṭṭhā gahitañca aggahitañca sabbaṃ saṅkaḍḍhitvā saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakapuggalehi imaṃ tantiṃ āropesi – ‘‘sabbepi maggasamaṅgino puggalā ṭhitakappino’’ti.
18 十八、圣者释义——因为远离烦恼,故为圣者。因为为包括天神在内的世间所应请,故为圣者。所谓“圣”义,即是清净义,因此也因清净而为圣者。其余者,因不清净而为非圣者。显示巴利原文
18. Ariyaniddese – kilesehi ārakattā ariyā. Sadevakena lokena araṇīyattā ariyā. Ariyaṭṭho nāma parisuddhaṭṭhoti parisuddhattāpi ariyā. Sesā aparisuddhatāya anariyā.
19 十九、有学者释义——处于道刹那者与处于果刹那者,皆在修学增上戒学等三学,故为有学。阿罗汉于证得阿罗汉果的刹那,便已学毕三学,此后更无应学之事,故为无学。因此,七种圣者仍在修学,是为有学。漏尽者因已于他人之处学完戒等,故为学已无学。佛与独觉佛由自觉而生,故为无学已无学。其余人既非正在修学,亦非学已,故为非有学非无学。显示巴利原文
19. Sekkhaniddese – maggasamaṅgino maggakkhaṇe, phalasamaṅgino ca phalakkhaṇe, adhisīlasikkhādikā tissopi sikkhā sikkhantiyevāti sekkhā. Arahatā pana arahattaphalakkhaṇe tisso sikkhā sikkhitā. Puna tassa sikkhanakiccaṃ natthīti asekkhā. Iti satta ariyā sikkhantīti sekkhā. Khīṇāsavā aññassa santike sīlādīnaṃ sikkhitattā sikkhitaasekkhā nāma. Buddhapaccekabuddhā sayambhūtatāya asikkhitaasekkhā nāma. Sesapuggalā neva sikkhanti na sikkhitāti nevasekkhānāsekkhā.
20 二十、三明释义——无论先成就宿命通与天眼通而后证得阿罗汉果,还是先证得阿罗汉果而后成就此二通,皆可名为三明。然而,经教的论述属方便说,论藏的论述属了义说,此处当以传承为准。因此,这里所指的,是先成就前二明而后证得阿罗汉果者。六通的情况也是如此。显示巴利原文
20. Tevijjaniddese – paṭhamaṃ pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuñāṇāni nibbattetvā pacchā arahattaṃ pattopi, paṭhamaṃ arahattaṃ patvā pacchā pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuñāṇanibbattakopi tevijjoyeva nāma. Suttantakathā pana pariyāyadesanā abhidhammakathā nippariyāyadesanāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne āgamanīyameva dhuraṃ. Tasmā paṭhamaṃ dve vijjā nibbattetvā pacchā arahattaṃ pattova idha adhippeto. Chaḷabhiññepi eseva nayo.
22 二十二、正等正觉者释义——“于前未曾闻”,是指最后一生证悟真理之前,未曾于任何他人之处有所听闻。然而,更早的过去生中,一切知菩萨曾于佛教法中出家,学通三藏,履行往返承事等义务,修习业处,行随顺、至种姓地而止。因此,这只是就最后一生无师自悟的情形而说。彼时,已圆满波罗蜜的如来,对于未从他人处听闻的有为法与无为法——即“此是苦……此是导致苦灭之道”等,以亲证之智现观四圣谛。显示巴利原文
22. Sammāsambuddhaniddese – pubbe ananussutesūti pacchimabhave saccappaṭivedhato pubbe aññassa kassaci santike assutapubbesu. Tato purimapurimesu pana bhavesu sabbaññubodhisattā buddhasāsane pabbajitvā tīṇi piṭakāni uggahetvā gatapaccāgatavattaṃ āruyha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anulomaṃ gotrabhuṃ āhacca ṭhapenti. Tasmā pacchimabhavasmiṃyeva anācariyakabhāvaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tadā hi tathāgato pūritapāramittā aññassa santike sāmaṃ ananussutesu saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammesu ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti attapaccakkhena ñāṇena cattāri saccāni abhisambujjhati.
其中,“于此”是指以体证四圣谛为特征的阿罗汉道。“获得一切知性及于诸力自在”,是指获得一切知智,并于诸力中成就自在。因为诸佛自从证得一切知智与十力智那一刻起,便再无其余应作之事。譬如一位出身纯正的刹帝利王子,在他的灌顶完成之后,便不能说“还有某种王权我尚未获得”,因为一切王权皆已获得。同样地,诸佛自从证得阿罗汉道那一刻起,便不能说“还有某种功德我未获得、未证悟、未现观”,因为属于一切知性的一切功德皆已获得、证悟、现观。“此被称为”,是说这样一位凭借圆满波罗蜜的威力,以圣道现证一切知性功德的士夫,便被称为正自觉者。显示巴利原文
Tattha cāti tasmiñca catusaccasambodhisaṅkhāte arahattamagge. Sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇāti balesu ca vasībhāvanti sabbaññutaññāṇañceva balesu ca ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti. Buddhānañhi sabbaññutaññāṇassa ceva dasabalañāṇassa ca adhigamanato paṭṭhāya aññaṃ kātabbaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā pana ubhatosujātassa khattiyakumārassa abhisekappattito paṭṭhāya ‘idaṃ nāma issariyaṃ anāgata’nti na vattabbaṃ, sabbaṃ āgatameva hoti. Evameva buddhānaṃ arahattamaggassa āgamanato paṭṭhāya ‘ayaṃ nāma guṇo na āgato, na paṭividdho, na paccakkho’ti na vattabbo, sabbepi sabbaññuguṇā āgatā paṭividdhā paccakkhakatāva honti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evaṃ pāramīpūraṇasiddhānubhāvena ariyamaggena paṭividdhasabbaññuguṇo puggalo sammāsambuddhoti vuccati.
23 二十三、在独觉佛的解说中,“于前未曾闻法”一句,其义应依前文所述之理来理解。因为独觉佛也是在最后一生中,不依师教而以自我策励之智证悟真理,但并未获得一切知智及于诸力中成就之自在。显示巴利原文
23. Paccekabuddhaniddesepi – pubbe ananussutesūti pade pubbe vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Paccekabuddhopi hi pacchimabhave anācariyako attukkaṃsikañāṇeneva paṭividdhasacco sabbaññutaññāṇañceva balesu ca ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ na pāpuṇāti.
24 二十四、在俱分解脱者的解说中,“以身触证八解脱而住”,是指证得并安住于与俱生的名身相应的八种等至。“以慧见而……”是指以观慧照见诸行,以道慧彻见四圣谛,因而断尽四漏。“此被称为”,是说如此之补特伽罗,称为俱分解脱者。他因从两个方面、两次解脱而被称为“俱分解脱”。对此,上座部的观点是:三藏小龙长老首先指出:“他以等至的镇伏而脱,以道的正断而脱,故从两面、两次得解脱。”三藏大法护长老则说:“这是依名而立义”,然后……显示巴利原文
24. Ubhatobhāgavimuttaniddese – aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharatīti aṭṭha samāpattiyo sahajātanāmakāyena paṭilabhitvā viharati. Paññāya cassa disvāti vipassanāpaññāya saṅkhāragataṃ, maggapaññāya cattāri saccāni passitvā cattāropi āsavā khīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ubhatobhāgavimutto nāmāti vuccati. Ayañhi dvīhi bhāgehi dve vāre vimuttoti ubhatobhāgavimutto. Tatrāyaṃ theravādo – tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero tāva āha – ‘‘samāpattiyā vikkhambhanavimokkhena, maggena samucchedavimokkhena vimuttoti ubhatobhāgehi dve vāre vimutto’’ti. Tipiṭakamahādhammarakkhitatthero ‘‘nāmanissitako eso’’ti vatvā –
世尊对优波私婆说:“犹如火焰被强风吹散,”
它趋向灭没,不落于任何名称。
同样地,牟尼从名身解脱,
“趋向灭没,不归于任何名称。”(《经集》1080)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Accī yathā vātavegena khittā, (upasīvāti bhagavā;) Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkhaṃ; Evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto, Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkha’’nti. (su. ni. 1080);
说完后,他引用经文说道:“因为从名身和色身两者都完全解脱,所以称为俱分解脱者。”三藏小无畏长老则说:“由等至镇伏而解脱,由道正断而解脱,因此是俱分解脱者。”这三位长老都是智者,他们认为这三种说法都有道理,于是将这三种说法作为定论一并保留。显示巴利原文
Vatvā suttaṃ āharitvā ‘‘nāmakāyato ca rūpakāyato ca suvimuttattā ubhatobhāgavimutto’’ti āha. Tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero panāha – ‘‘samāpattiyā vikkhambhanavimokkhena ekavāraṃ vimutto maggena samucchedavimokkhena ekavāraṃ vimuttoti ubhatobhāgavimutto’’ti. Ime pana tayopi therā paṇḍitā, ‘tiṇṇampi vāde kāraṇaṃ dissatī’ti tiṇṇampi vādaṃ tantiṃ katvā ṭhapayiṃsu.
简而言之,以无色等至从色身解脱,以道从名身解脱,因从这两方面都解脱,故称俱分解脱者。他共有五种:前四种是在四种无色等至的每一种等至出定后,观诸行而证得阿罗汉果的人;第五种是从灭尽定出定后证得阿罗汉果的阿那含。其中,前四种人未证入作为等至之顶的灭尽定,因此是方便说的俱分解脱者。而证得八等至的阿那含,入灭尽定后从定出,增长观智而证得阿罗汉果,是非方便说的最胜俱分解脱者。难道无色界禅那不也是以舍与心一境性为二禅支,色界第四禅那也是如此吗?既然如此,以第四禅那为近因而证得阿罗汉果的人也应该称为俱分解脱者吗?不应这样说。为什么?因为他并未从色身解脱。色界第四禅那只从烦恼身解脱,而非从色身解脱。因此,从第四禅那出定后证得阿罗汉果者,不称为俱分解脱者。然而,无色界禅那既从名身解脱也从色身解脱,所以以无色界禅那为基础而证得阿罗汉果者,应知是俱分解脱者。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepato pana arūpasamāpattiyā rūpakāyato vimutto, maggena nāmakāyato vimuttoti ubhohi bhāgehi vimuttattā ubhatobhāgavimutto. So catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnaṃ ekekato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasitvā arahattaṃ pattānaṃ catunnaṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pattassa anāgāmino ca vasena pañcavidho hoti. Tattha purimā cattāro samāpattisīsaṃ nirodhaṃ na samāpajjantīti pariyāyena ubhatobhāgavimuttā nāma. Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī anāgāmī taṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pattoti nippariyāyena ubhatobhāgavimuttaseṭṭho nāma. Nanu ca arūpāvacarajjhānampi upekkhācittekaggatāhi duvaṅgikaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānampi, tasmā tampi padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā arahattaṃ pattena ubhatobhāgavimuttena bhavitabbanti? Na bhavitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Rūpakāyato avimuttattā. Tañhi kilesakāyatova vimuttaṃ, na rūpakāyato; tasmā tato vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ patto ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma na hoti . Arūpāvacaraṃ pana nāmakāyato ca vimuttaṃ rūpakāyato cāti tadeva pādakaṃ katvā arahattaṃ patto ubhatobhāgavimutto hotīti veditabbo.
25 二十五、释慧解脱者 ——“以慧解脱”故称慧解脱者。此有五种:纯观行者,以及从四种禅那出定后证得阿罗汉果的四种人。此中,无一人是获得八解脱者。正因如此,才说“并非获得八解脱”等语。然而,若具有任一种无色界禅那,则必定成为俱分解脱者。显示巴利原文
25. Paññāvimuttaniddese – paññāya vimuttoti paññāvimutto. So sukkhavipassako catūhi jhānehi vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pattā cattāro cāti pañcavidho hoti. Etesu hi ekopi aṭṭhavimokkhalābhī na hoti. Teneva na heva kho aṭṭha vimokkhetiādimāha. Arūpāvacarajjhānesu pana ekasmiṃ sati ubhatobhāgavimuttoyeva nāma hotīti.
26 二十六、释身证者 ——“某些漏”指被下三道所断的漏。“称为”指如此类型之人称为身证者。因其触证之后即作证,故名身证者。他先触证禅那之触,随后作证灭尽涅槃,故亦称身证者。此人从住于须陀洹果开始,直至住于阿罗汉道,共有六种。显示巴利原文
26. Kāyasakkhiniddese – ekacce āsavāti heṭṭhimamaggattayavajjhā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo kāyasakkhīti vuccati. So hi phuṭṭhantaṃ sacchikarotīti kāyasakkhī. Jhānaphassaṃ paṭhamaṃ phusati, pacchā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikarotītipi kāyasakkhī. So sotāpattiphalaṭṭhaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattamaggaṭṭhā chabbidho hoti.
27 二十七、释见至者 ——“这是苦”意为这是苦,苦唯有这么多,无过于此。于苦集等亦同此理。“如实地了知”指除了渴爱,将五取蕴依其真实本质了知为“苦谛”。然而,渴爱令苦产生、生起、出现,由此苦集生起;因此他如实地了知此为“苦集”。又,此苦与集达至涅槃后即灭尽、寂止,不再转起;故他如实地了知此为“苦灭”。而八圣道则通向彼苦灭;故他如实地了知此为“导向苦灭之道”。以上显示了不同刹那的谛之确定。为说明同一刹那,今说“如来所宣说”等。其中,“如来所宣说”指如来坐于大菩提座上,所证悟、所知、所显了的。“法”指四圣谛法。“已善见”即已善能照见。“已善行”即已善能行持,意为他以智慧于此诸法中善行。“称为”指如此类型之人称为见至者。因他已到达所见。他有“诸行是苦,灭为乐”的智。由于以智慧已见、已知、已作证、已观见,故为见至者。此人亦如身证者,共有六种。显示巴利原文
27. Diṭṭhippattaniddese – idaṃ dukkhanti idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito uddhaṃ dukkhaṃ. Dukkhasamudayādīsupi eseva nayo. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ pañcupādānakkhandhe ‘dukkhasacca’nti yāthāvasarasato pajānāti. Taṇhā pana dukkhaṃ janeti nibbatteti, pabhāveti, tato taṃ dukkhaṃ samudeti; tasmā naṃ ayaṃ ‘dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yasmā pana idaṃ dukkhañca samudayo ca nibbānaṃ patvā nirujjhanti vūpasammanti appavattiṃ gacchanti; tasmā naṃ ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Ariyo pana aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, taṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati; tena taṃ ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Ettāvatā nānākkhaṇe saccavavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ. Idāni ekakkhaṇe dassetuṃ tathāgatappaveditātiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatappaveditāti mahābodhimaṇḍe nisīdatvā tathāgatena paṭividdhā viditā pākaṭīkatā. Dhammāti catusaccadhammā. Vodiṭṭhā hontīti sudiṭṭhā honti. Vocaritāti sucaritā. Tesu anena paññā suṭṭhu carāpitā hotīti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo diṭṭhippattoti vuccati. Ayañhi diṭṭhantaṃ patto. ‘‘Dukkhā saṅkhārā, sukho nirodho’’ti ñāṇaṃ hoti . Diṭṭhaṃ viditaṃ sacchikataṃ passitaṃ paññāyāti diṭṭhappatto. Ayampi kāyasakkhī viya chabbidhova hoti.
28 关于信解脱的解释——“但不同于见至者”,意思是:不像见至者那样诸漏已尽,信解脱者的漏并未如此灭尽。那么,他们在断除烦恼上是否有差别呢?并没有。既然如此,为何信解脱者不能达到见至呢?因为他们入道的方式不同。见至者在入道时镇伏烦恼,能够以少苦、少难、不感疲累地镇伏;而信解脱者则须以苦、以难、疲惫地才能镇伏,因此不能达到见至。再者,他们的智慧也有差别。见至者对于上三道,其观智锐利、勇猛、明净地运作;信解脱者的观智则不锐利、不勇猛、不明净地运作,因此他也不能达到见至。显示巴利原文
28. Saddhāvimuttaniddese – no ca kho yathā diṭṭhippattassāti yathā diṭṭhippattassa āsavā parikkhīṇā, na evaṃ saddhāvimuttassāti attho. Kiṃ pana nesaṃ kilesappahāne nānattaṃ atthīti? Natthi. Atha kasmā saddhāvimutto diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇātīti? Āgamanīyanānattena. Diṭṭhippato hi āgamanamhi kilese vikkhambhento appadukkhena appakasirena akilamantova vikkhambhetuṃ sakkoti. Saddhāvimutto pana dukkhena kasirena kilamanto hutvā vikkhambhetuṃ sakkoti, tasmā diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Apica nesaṃ paññāyapi nānattaṃ atthiyeva. Diṭṭhippattassa hi upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ tikkhaṃ sūraṃ pasannaṃ hutvā vahati. Saddhāvimuttassa vipassanāñāṇaṃ no tikkhaṃ sūraṃ pasannaṃ hutvā vahati, tasmāpi so diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇāti.
正如两位青年展示技艺,一人手握利剑,一人手握钝剑。以利剑砍芭蕉时,寂静无声;以钝剑砍时,则发出‘嘎吱嘎吱’的声响。在这比喻中,应知利剑砍芭蕉而无声,即如见至者对于三道之观智的锐利、勇猛、明净状态;钝剑砍芭蕉而有声,即如信解脱者对于三道之观智的不锐利、不勇猛、不明净状态。不过,虽有这样的理趣,结论仍是:正是因为入道的方式不同,信解脱者才不能达到见至。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi dvīsu taruṇesu sippaṃ dassentesu ekassa hatthe tikhiṇo asi, ekassa kuṇṭho. Tikhiṇena asinā kadalī chijjamānā saddaṃ na karoti. Kuṇṭhena asinā chijjamānā ‘kaṭakaṭā’ti saddaṃ karoti. Tattha tikhiṇena asinā saddaṃ akarontiyā eva kadaliyā chedanaṃ viya diṭṭhippattassa tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanāñāṇassa tikhiṇasūravippasannabhāvo. Kuṇṭhena asinā saddaṃ karontiyāpi kadaliyā chedanaṃ viya saddhāvimuttassa tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanāñāṇassa atikhiṇaasūraappasannabhāvo veditabbo. Imaṃ pana nayaṃ ‘no’ti paṭikkhipitvā, āgamanīyanānatteneva saddhāvimutto diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇātīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ.
然而,在诸义注中这样说:“在这两者之中,信解脱者于前分道的刹那,犹如依信、依净信、依胜解而灭尽烦恼。见至者于前分道的刹那,断烦恼的智慧无有迟钝,锐利、勇猛地运作。因此,就像以极利之剑砍芭蕉时,砍处并不平滑,剑行也不迅速,还发出声响,须施加更用力的努力;应知信解脱者的前分道修习即是如此。又像以极善磨之剑砍芭蕉时,砍处平滑,剑行迅捷,缄默无声,无需费力;应知见至者的前分道修习即是如此。”所谓“信解脱者”,就是指这一类人。因为他以信而解脱,故称信解脱者。此人也如同身证者,共有六种。显示巴利原文
Āgamaṭṭhakathāsu pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘etesu hi saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe saddahantassa viya okappentassa viya adhimuccantassa viya ca kilesakkhayo hoti. Diṭṭhippattassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe kilesacchedakañāṇaṃ adandhaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūraṃ hutvā vahati. Tasmā yathā nāma atikhiṇena asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ na maṭṭhaṃ hoti, asi na sīghaṃ vahati, saddo suyyati, balavataro vāyāmo kātabbo hoti ; evarūpā saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā. Yathā pana sunisiteneva asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ hoti, asi sīghaṃ vahati, saddo na suyyati, balavavāyāmakiccaṃ na hoti; evarūpā diṭṭhippattassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā veditabbā’’ti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo saddhāvimuttoti vuccati. Ayañhi saddahanto vimuttoti saddhāvimutto. Ayampi kāyasakkhī viya chabbidhova hoti.
29 在随法行的解说中——「已行道者」以此显示处于入流道之人。「增上」指强而有力。「运载慧」意为以慧运载。也可解释为:慧运载此人,故称「慧运载者」。「以慧为先导」即是以慧作为先行者。「被称为」指这一类的人称为随法行者。因为他随念、随忆那名为慧的法,故为随法行者。这仅是处于入流道者的名称。当证得果时,则名为见至者。显示巴利原文
29. Dhammānusārīniddese – paṭipannassāti iminā sotāpattimaggaṭṭho dassito. Adhimattanti balavaṃ. Paññaṃ vāhetīti paññāvāhī. Paññā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti paññāvāhītipi vuttaṃ hoti. Paññāpubbaṅgamanti paññaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo dhammānusārīti vuccati. So hi paññāsaṅkhātena dhammena sarati anussaratīti dhammānusārī. Sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Phale pana patte diṭṭhippatto nāma hoti.
30 在信随行者的解说中——以信运载,故称「信运者」。信心运载此人,故亦可说为「信运者」。「信前行」即是以信心为先导。此人被称为——即此类人被称作「信随行者」。因为他以信心而忆念、随念,故为信随行者。这仅是入流道位者的名称。证得果位时,则名为「信解脱者」。对于生起出世间法者,有两轭、两种投入、两首。其中,信轭与慧轭称为两轭。一位比丘以止的投入而投入,另一位以观的投入而投入——这称为两种投入。一位达到顶点时成为俱分解脱者,另一位成为慧解脱者——这称为两首。凡是生起出世间法者,他们全都以这两法为轭,在此两处投入之后,由此两处而解脱。其中,一位证得八等至的比丘,以慧为轭,依止而投入,以某一无色等至为近因,修观而证得阿罗汉,他在入流道刹那名为「法随行者」。此后在六处名为「身证者」。证得阿罗汉果时,名为「俱分解脱者」。显示巴利原文
30. Saddhānusārīniddesepi – saddhaṃ vāhetīti saddhāvāhī. Saddhā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti saddhāvāhītipi vuttameva. Saddhāpubbaṅgamanti saddhaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo saddhānusārīti vuccati. So hi saddhāya sarati. Anussaratīti saddhānusārī. Sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Phale pana patte saddhāvimutto nāma hoti. Lokuttaradhammañhi nibbattentānaṃ dve dhurāni nāma, dve abhinivesā nāma, dve sīsāni nāma. Tattha saddhādhuraṃ paññādhuranti – dve dhurāni nāma. Eko pana bhikkhu samathābhinivesena abhinivisati, eko vipassanābhinivesenāti – ime dve abhinivesā nāma. Eko ca matthakaṃ pāpuṇanto ubhatobhāgavimutto hoti, eko paññāvimuttoti – imāni dve sīsāni nāma. Ye keci hi lokuttaradhammaṃ nibbattenti, sabbe te ime dve dhamme dhuraṃ katvā imesu dvīsu ṭhānesu abhinivisitvā imehi dvīhi ṭhānehi vimuccanti. Tesu yo bhikkhu aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī paññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā samathavasena abhiniviṭṭho aññataraṃ arūpasamāpattiṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, so sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe dhammānusārī nāma. Parato pana chasu ṭhānesu kāyasakkhī nāma. Arahattaphale patte ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma.
另一位比丘唯以慧为轭,依观而投入,对纯行蕴或色界禅那中的某一所缘进行思惟后证得阿罗汉,他在入流道刹那也名为「法随行者」。此后在六处则名为「见至者」。证得阿罗汉时,名为「慧解脱者」。此处有两个新名称,与前面五个合为七个。另一位证得八等至的比丘,以信为轭,依定而投入,以某一无色等至为近因,修观后证得阿罗汉——他在入流道刹那名为「信随行者」。此后在六处即名「身证者」。证得阿罗汉时,即名「俱分解脱者」。此处只有一个新名称,与前面五个合为六个。另一位唯以信为轭,依观而投入,对纯行蕴或色界禅那中的某一所缘进行思惟后证得阿罗汉。他在入流道刹那也名为「信随行者」。此后在六处名为「信解脱者」。证得阿罗汉时,名为「慧解脱者」。此处也只有一个新名称,与前面六个合为七个。这七种人在世间被尊为最上应供者。显示巴利原文
Aparo paññameva dhuraṃ katvā vipassanāvasena abhiniviṭṭho suddhasaṅkhāre vā rūpāvacarajjhānesu vā aññataraṃ sammasitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayampi sotāpattimaggakkhaṇeyeva dhammānusārī nāma. Parato pana chasu ṭhānesu diṭṭhippatto nāma. Arahatte patte paññāvimutto nāma. Idha dve nāmāni apubbāni, tāni purimehi saddhiṃ pañca honti. Aparo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī saddhaṃ dhuraṃ katvā samādhivasena abhiniviṭṭho aññataraṃ arūpasamāpattiṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti – ayaṃ sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe saddhānusārī nāma. Parato chasu ṭhānesu kāyasakkhīyeva nāma. Arahatte patte ubhatobhāgavimuttoyeva nāma. Idha ekameva nāmaṃ apubbaṃ. Tena saddhiṃ purimāni pañca cha honti. Aparo saddhameva dhuraṃ katvā vipassanāvasena abhiniviṭṭho suddhasaṅkhāre vā rūpāvacarajjhānesu vā aññataraṃ sammasitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ayampi sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe saddhānusārī nāma. Parato chasu ṭhānesu saddhāvimutto nāma. Arahatte patte paññāvimutto nāma. Idhāpi ekameva nāmaṃ apubbaṃ. Tena saddhiṃ purimāni cha satta honti. Ime satta puggalā loke aggadakkhiṇeyyā nāmāti.
31 在“极七返”的解说中——“七返”即七次。“极七返”是指他的轮回受生、结取后有最多七次,此后不再取第八有,故称“极七返”。所谓“须陀洹”,此处以“流”为圣道,具足此圣道者即名“须陀洹”。如经文所说——显示巴利原文
31. Sattakkhattuparamaniddese – sattakkhattunti sattavāre. Sattakkhattuparamā bhavūpapatti attabhāvaggahaṇaṃ assa, tato paraṃ aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ nādiyatīti sattakkhattuparamo. Sotāpanno hotīti ettha sototi ariyamaggo, tena samannāgato sotāpanno nāma. Yathāha –
“所谓‘流、流’,舍利弗,究竟何为流?”“尊者,此圣八支道即是流,即:正见……乃至……正定。”“所谓‘须陀洹、须陀洹’,舍利弗,究竟何为须陀洹?”“尊者,凡是具足此圣八支道者,即称为须陀洹,即这位具如是名、如是姓的尊者等。”(相应部5.1001)显示巴利原文
‘‘Soto sototi hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sototi? Ayameva hi, bhante, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo soto, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhīti. Sotāpanno sotāpannoti, hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sotāpannoti? Yo hi, bhante, iminā ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena samannāgato ayaṃ vuccati sotāpanno, svāyaṃ āyasmā evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto iti vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1001).
如是,即使在道刹那,亦可名为须陀洹。然而,此处是以道之名而授于果,故特指在果刹那的须陀洹。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ maggakkhaṇepi sotāpanno nāma hoti. Idha pana maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinnanti phalakkhaṇe sotāpanno adhippeto.
“不退堕法”,谓不再以转生的方式趣入那名为恶趣的堕处之本性。“决定”,指依道决定而得决定。“正觉为归宿”,谓以觉悟为最终归宿。他因已证得的道而觉悟,故称“正觉为归宿”;更凭上面的三道必将觉悟,故称“正觉为归宿”。“于天及人中”,指天界与人界。“流转轮回后”,指以结生而一再转生。“作苦之边际”,即作轮回苦的边际与终结。此人被称为“极七返”——当知这是就时而天界、时而人界的杂有而说。显示巴利原文
Avinipātadhammoti vinipātasaṅkhātaṃ apāyaṃ upapattivasena anāgamanasabhāvo. Niyatoti magganiyāmena niyato. Sambodhiparāyaṇoti bujjhanakabhāvaparāyaṇo. So hi paṭiladdhamaggena bujjhatīti sambodhiparāyaṇo. Upari tīhi maggehi avassaṃ bujjhissatīti sambodhiparāyaṇo. Deve ca manusse cāti devalokañca manussalokañca. Sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvāti paṭisandhivasena aparāparaṃ gantvā. Dukkhassantaṃ karotīti vaṭṭadukkhassa pariyantaṃ parivaṭumaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo sattakkhattuparamo nāma vuccati. Ayaṃ pana kālena devalokassa kālena manussalokassa vasena missakabhavena kathitoti veditabbo.
32 “家家”的解说:从家至家,故名“家家”。从证得须陀洹果开始,便不再有生于低贱之家的事,唯生于大富之家,这是其义。“二或三家”,是按天与人而说有二有或三有。如此,这也仅是就杂有而说。所谓“二或三”,仅是言说而已。即使流转到第六有,也仍是“家家”。显示巴利原文
32. Kolaṃkolaniddese – kulato kulaṃ gacchatīti kolaṃkolo. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyato hi paṭṭhāya nīce kule upapatti nāma natthi, mahābhogakulesuyeva nibbattatīti attho. Dve vā tīṇi vā kulānīti devamanussavasena dve vā tayo vā bhave. Iti ayampi missakabhaveneva kathito. Desanāmattameva cetaṃ – ‘dve vā tīṇi vā’ti. Yāva chaṭṭhabhavā saṃsarantopi pana kolaṃkolova hoti.
33 “一种子”的解说:所说“蕴种子”,凡须陀洹唯有一蕴种子、一再生结生者,即名为“一种子”。“人界有”在此仅是言说,也可说生于天界有。这些名称是世尊依所取之名而安立的。世尊取用了这些名称:达到此位者为“极七返”,达到此位者为“家家”,达到此位者为“一种子”。然而并非决定说这是极七返、这是家家、这是一种子。显示巴利原文
33. Ekabījiniddese – khandhabījaṃ nāma kathitaṃ. Yassa hi sotāpannassa ekaṃyeva khandhabījaṃ atthi, ekaṃ attabhāvaggahaṇaṃ, so ekabījī nāma. Mānusakaṃ bhavanti idaṃ panettha desanāmattameva. Devabhavaṃ nibbattetītipi pana vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Bhagavatā gahitanāmavaseneva cetāni etesaṃ nāmāni. Ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gato sattakkhattuparamo nāma hoti, ettakaṃ kolaṃkolo, ettakaṃ ekabījīti bhagavatā etesaṃ nāmaṃ gahitaṃ. Niyamato pana ayaṃ sattakkhattuparamo, ayaṃ kolaṃkolo, ayaṃ ekabījīti natthi.
那么,是谁确定了他们之间的这种差别呢?对此,有些长老说“是前因所确定”,有些说“是初道”,有些说“是上三道”,有些说“是三道之观智”。其中,在“前因所确定”的说法中,会招致“初道的亲依止缘已被造作,而上三道却无亲依止缘而生起”的过失。在“初道所确定”的说法中,会招致上三道毫无意义的过失。在“上三道所确定”的说法中,会招致“在上三道尚未生起时,它们自身便已生起”的过失。而“三道之观智所确定”的说法才是合理的。因为若上三道的观智强,则称之为“单种者”;比那次弱的,是“家家者”;比那次弱的,是“七次至多者”。显示巴利原文
Ko pana tesaṃ etaṃ pabhedaṃ niyametīti? Keci tāva therā ‘pubbahetu niyametī’ti vadanti, keci ‘paṭhamamaggo’, keci ‘upari tayo maggā’, keci ‘tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā’ti. Tattha ‘pubbahetu niyametī’ti vāde ‘paṭhamamaggassa upanissayo kato nāma hoti, upari tayo maggā nirupanissayā uppannā’ti vacanaṃ āpajjati. ‘Paṭhamamaggo niyametī’ti vāde upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ niratthakatā āpajjati. ‘Upari tayo maggā niyamentī’ti vāde ‘aṭṭhamamagge anuppanneyeva upari tayo maggā uppannā’ti āpajjati. ‘Tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā niyametī’ti vādo pana yujjati. Sace hi upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā balavatī hoti, ekabījī nāma hoti; tato mandatarāya kolaṃkolo; tato mandatarāya sattakkhattuparamoti.
确实,有些须陀洹(入流者)心乐轮回、喜着轮回,屡屡于轮回中流转、显现。譬如长者给孤独、优婆夷毗舍佉、车乘小天子和大战车小天子、杂色小天子、诸天主帝释天、龙施小天子——这些人便是心乐轮回、喜着轮回,从最初便发愿,在六欲天层层辗转,直至最后于[最低天界]般涅槃的。此处所举,尚非全部。并非只此而已,就像有些人在人界流转数生后证得阿罗汉果;有些人在天界般涅槃,亦在天界流转数生后证得阿罗汉果,这些在这里都没有被全部包括。应知“单种者”、“家家者”、“七次至多者”以及生于人间的“单种者”,皆由因缘的差别而被称为种姓者。这其中,有一种是苦行道,四种是现法[般涅槃]。如同那二十六位信根强的天人,四种流转者与单种者,共计为十二种。如同依智慧之力,能通达世间法与出世间法,他们声称“我将证得出世间法”,并安住于此境地。虽然他们得到了“七次至多者”等身份,但依修行之道,亦可获得十二种果位。这便是对于二十六类众生于此处证得入流果之所说。显示巴利原文
Ekacco hi sotāpanno vaṭṭajjhāsayo hoti, vaṭṭābhirato, punappunaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃyeva vicarati sandissati. Anāthapiṇḍiko seṭṭhi, visākhā upāsikā, cūḷarathamahārathā devaputtā, anekavaṇṇo devaputto, sakko devarājā, nāgadatto devaputtoti ime hi ettakā janā vaṭṭajjhāsayā vaṭṭābhiratā ādito paṭṭhāya cha devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhe ṭhatvā parinibbāyissanti, ime idha na gahitā. Na kevalañcime; yopi manussesuyeva sattakkhattuṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, yopi devaloke nibbatto devesuyeva sattakkhattuṃ aparāparaṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, imepi idha na gahitā. Missakabhavavaseneva panettha sattakkhattuparamakolaṃkolā mānusakabhavanibbattakoyeva ca ekabījī gahitoti veditabbo. Tattha ekeko dukkhāpaṭipadādivasena catubbidhabhāvaṃ āpajjati. Saddhādhureneva cattāro sattakkhattuparamā, cattāro kolaṃkolā, cattāro ekabījinoti dvādasa honti. Sace paññāya sakkā nibbattetuṃ, ‘ahaṃ lokuttaraṃ dhammaṃ nibbattessāmī’ti evaṃ paññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sattakkhattuparamādibhāvaṃ pattāpi paṭipadāvasena dvādasevāti ime catuvīsati sotāpannā ihaṭṭhakanijjhānikavaseneva imasmiṃ ṭhāne kathitāti veditabbā.
34 三十四、释“一来者”——以结生义,只再来一次者,称为一来者。“只一次”即仅此一回。“来此世间”一语,是选取了五种一来者中的四种后,单取的一种。因有一类人于此世证得一来果后,即于此处般涅槃;一类人于此世证果后,生于天界而般涅槃;一类人于天界证果后,即于彼处般涅槃;一类人于天界证果后,投生人间而般涅槃。这四类并未被全部收录。有一类人于此世证果后,在天界度过若干岁月,再投生人间而般涅槃,唯有这一种被收录。其余诸义,应如后文《法集论》注释中“出世善论”所阐述的那样去了知。“单种者”与“一来者”有何差别?“单种者”唯有一次结生,“一来者”则有两次结生,这便是差别所在。显示巴利原文
34. Sakadāgāminiddese – paṭisandhivasena sakiṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī. Sakidevāti ekavāraṃyeva. Imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvāti iminā pañcasu sakadāgāmīsu cattāro vajjetvā ekova gahito. Ekacco hi idha sakadāgāmiphalaṃ patvā idheva parinibbāyati, ekacco idha patvā devaloke parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā tattheva parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati – ime cattāropi idha na gahitā. Yo pana idha patvā devaloke yāvatāyukaṃ vasitvā puna idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati – ayaṃ ekova idha gahitoti veditabbo. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ lokuttarakusalaniddese vuttameva. Imassa pana sakadāgāmino ekabījinā saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Ekabījissa ekāva paṭisandhi, sakadāgāmissa dve paṭisandhiyo – idaṃ nesaṃ nānākaraṇanti.
35 35. 关于不还者的释义——“orambhāgiyānaṃ”指下分结,即系属于欲界的结缚。“下”即指欲界。若此五结尚未断除,纵使此人转生于有顶天,也如同吞钩之鱼、足系长绳之鸦,被这些结缚所牵,终归只在欲界中流转。因此,这五种结缚称为“下分结”。所谓“遍尽”,即是这些结缚的断尽无余。“Upapātika”指化生者。在此处,意指他于结生之顷刻便得般涅槃,即于净居天中证得涅槃,不复还于此世间,故称“不还”。“世间”即诸界,因结生之故存有诸界,而此不还者不复还于这些世间。佛、圣者、法音的听闻,对他而言并非再来之因,故说“此谓不还者”,即此类圣者因无复还之相,是名不还。显示巴利原文
35. Anāgāminiddese – orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānanti oraṃ vuccati kāmadhātu. Yassa imāni pañca bandhanāni appahīnāni honti, so bhavagge nibbattopi gilitabaḷiso maccho viya dīghasuttakena pāde baddhakāko viya tehi bandhanehi ākaḍḍhiyamāno kāmadhātuyaṃyeva pavattatīti pañca bandhanāni orambhāgiyānīti vuccanti. Heṭṭhābhāgiyāni heṭṭhākoṭṭhāsikānīti attho. Parikkhayāti tesaṃ bandhanānaṃ parikkhayena. Opapātikoti upapātayoniko. Imināssa gabbhaseyyā paṭikkhittā. Tattha parinibbāyīti tattha suddhāvāsaloke parinibbāyitā. Anāvattidhammo tasmā lokāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena tasmā lokā idha anāvattanasabhāvo. Buddhadassanatheradassanadhammassavanānaṃ panatthāyassa āgamanaṃ anivāritaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evaṃvidho puggalo paṭisandhivasena puna anāgamanato anāgāmī nāma vuccati.
36 36. 关于中般涅槃者的释义——“或于结生后随即”指结生之后旋即。“寿命未达中半”指未至寿量之中间,于此之际便能证得圣道。复由“或”字之别,亦应知有已达寿量之半而般涅槃之义。如是,中般涅槃者立为三种。所谓“上分结”,即指五种上分结与八种烦恼之和,意为舍弃这些结缚而证道。此类圣者于寿命中段便得涅槃,故名“中般涅槃者”。显示巴利原文
36. Antarāparinibbāyiniddese – upapannaṃ vā samanantarāti upapannasamanantarā vā hutvā. Appattaṃ vā vemajjhaṃ āyuppamāṇanti āyuppamāṇaṃ vemajjhaṃ appattaṃ vā hutvā ariyamaggaṃ sañjanetīti attho. Vāsaddavikappato pana vemajjhaṃ pattantipi attho veditabbo. Evaṃ tayo antarāparinibbāyino siddhā honti. Upariṭṭhimānaṃ saṃyojanānanti upari pañcannaṃ uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vā kilesānaṃ. Pahānāyāti etesaṃ pajahanatthāya maggaṃ sañjaneti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo āyuvemajjhassa antarāyeva parinibbāyanato antarāparinibbāyīti vuccati.
37 37. 关于生般涅槃者的释义——“已超寿量之半”,即寿命已过中间值。“或临命终时”指接近命终之际。意为安住于寿尽之边缘。此类圣者于无烦天中,其寿量为一千劫,于其中间之半——即第五百年过后,于第六百年、第七百年乃至最后百年,才证得阿拉汉道,得无垢涅槃,故称“此谓生般涅槃者”。显示巴利原文
37. Upahaccaparinibbāyiniddese – atikkamitvā vemajjhaṃ āyuppamāṇanti āyuppamāṇaṃ vemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā. Upahacca vā kālakiriyanti upagantvā kālakiriyaṃ. Āyukkhayassa āsanne ṭhatvāti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo avihesu tāva kappasahassappamāṇassa āyuno pañcakappasatasaṅkhātaṃ vemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā chaṭṭhe vā kappasate sattamaṭṭhamanavamānaṃ vā aññatarasmiṃ dasameyeva vā kappasate ṭhatvā arahattaṃ patvā kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyanato upahaccaparinibbāyīti vuccati.
38 在无行般涅槃与有行般涅槃的解释中:不依加行、不借苦行、不策励增上精进,便以烦恼般涅槃而具足般涅槃法者,是为无行般涅槃者。依加行、借苦行、经历艰辛,策励增上精进之后,方以烦恼般涅槃而具足般涅槃法者,是为有行般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
38. Asaṅkhārasasaṅkhāraparinibbāyiniddesesu – asaṅkhārena appadukkhena adhimattapayogaṃ akatvāva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbānadhammoti asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Sasaṅkhārena dukkhena kasirena adhimattapayogaṃ katvāva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyanadhammoti sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī.
40 在上流者的解释中:由于具有向上流注的状态,他的渴爱之流或轮转之流是向上的,故称为‘上流’。或者,由于向上而行之后方能证得,他的道流是向上的,故称为‘上流’。前往色究竟天者,为‘色究竟天往者’。在‘从无热天死后,前往无烦天’等描述中,若在无热天住一千劫仍未能证得阿拉汉,便前往无烦天;在那里住二千劫仍未能证得阿拉汉,便前往善见天;在那里住四千劫仍未能证得阿拉汉,便前往善现天;在那里住八千劫仍未能证得阿拉汉,便前往色究竟天。于此处安住并证得圣道,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
40. Uddhaṃsotaniddese – uddhaṃ vāhibhāvena uddhamassa taṇhāsotaṃ vaṭṭasotaṃ vāti uddhaṃsoto. Uddhaṃ vā gantvā paṭilabhitabbato uddhamassa maggasotanti uddhaṃsoto. Akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti akaniṭṭhagāmī. Avihā cuto atappaṃ gacchatītiādīsu avihe kappasahassaṃ vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā atappaṃ gacchati. Tatrāpi dve kappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā sudassaṃ gacchati. Tatrāpi cattāri kappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā sudassiṃ gacchati. Tatrāpi aṭṭha kappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Tattha vasanto ariyamaggaṃ sañjanetīti attho.
然而,为了了知这些不还者的分类,应明了‘上流者、色究竟天往者’的四分法。其中,从无热天开始,历净四天界后,前往色究竟天而般涅槃者,此是‘上流者亦是色究竟天往者’。历净下方三天界后,住于善现天而般涅槃者,此是‘上流者而非色究竟天往者’。从此直接前往色究竟天而般涅槃者,此是‘非上流者而是色究竟天往者’。在下方四天界中,随其所生之处即般涅槃者,此是‘非上流者亦非色究竟天往者’。如此,共有四十八种不还者。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ pana anāgāmīnaṃ pabhedajānanatthaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmīcatukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha yo avihato paṭṭhāya cattāro devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gantvā parinibbāyati ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana heṭṭhā tayo devaloke sodhetvā sudassīdevaloke ṭhatvā parinibbāyati – ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto, na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma . Yo pana ito akaniṭṭhameva gantvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto, akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma . Yo pana heṭṭhā catūsu devalokesu tattha tattheva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto, na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāmāti. Evamete aṭṭhacattālīsa anāgāmino honti.
如何呢?在无热天中,有三位中般涅槃者、一位生般涅槃者、一位上流者,如此无行般涅槃者五位,有行般涅槃者五位,共为十位。同样地,在无烦天、善见天、善现天,如此四个十位,合为四十位。在色究竟天中,则无上流者,唯有三位中般涅槃者、一位生般涅槃者,如此无行般涅槃者四位,有行般涅槃者四位,共为八位。这样总计四十八位。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Avihe tāva tayo antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyī, eko uddhaṃsoto te asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañca, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañcāti dasa honti. Tathā atappāsudassāsudassīsūti cattāro dasakā cattālīsaṃ. Akaniṭṭhe pana uddhaṃsoto natthi. Tayo pana antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyī. Te asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāro, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāroti aṭṭha. Evaṃ aṭṭhacattālīsaṃ honti.
他们全部以火花譬喻来说明:如同在连日晒热的铁砧上锤击铁屑、铁片、铁钉屑时,有火花迸出即灭——应知第一种中般涅槃者如此。何以故?因为他生起之后随即以烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤击时,火花迸出,腾越空中而灭——应知第二种中般涅槃者如此。何以故?因为他未达中间便般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤击时,火花迸出,腾越空中,未触地面而灭——应知第三种中般涅槃者如此。何以故?因为他到达中间而未触便般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤击时,火花迸出,腾越空中,落于地上,触地而灭——应知生般涅槃者如此。何以故?因为他接近命终,耗尽寿行而般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤击时,火花落于少量草木上,烧尽那少量草木而灭——应知无行般涅槃者如此。何以故?因为他以少功用、轻快的趋向而般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤击时,火花落于大量草木堆上,烧尽那大量草木堆而灭——应知有行般涅槃者如此。何以故?因为他以有功用、不轻快的趋向而般涅槃。另一种情况,火花落于大草木堆中,当大草木堆燃烧时,炽热的火炭或火焰腾起,烧尽铁匠铺,烧尽村、镇、城、国,到达海边而灭——应知上流者如此。显示巴利原文
Te sabbepi papaṭikopamāya dīpitā – divasaṃ santattānampi hi ārakaṇṭakavipphalikanakhacchedanānaṃ ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā uppajjitvāva nibbāyati – evarūpo paṭhamo antarāparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Uppannasamanantarāva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā ākāsaṃ ullaṅghitvā nibbāyati – evarūpo dutiyo antarāparinibbāyī daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā? Vemajjhaṃ appatvā parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā ākāsaṃ ullaṅghitvā nivattamānā pathaviyaṃ anupahaccatalā hutvā parinibbāyati – evarūpo tatiyo antarāparinibbāyī daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā? Vemajjhaṃ patvā anupahacca parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā ākāsaṃ ullaṅghitvā pathaviyaṃ patitvā upahaccatalā hutvā nibbāyati – evarūpo upahaccaparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Kālakiriyaṃ upagantvā āyugatiṃ khepetvā parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā paritte tiṇakaṭṭhe patitvā taṃ parittaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhaṃ jhāpetvā nibbāyati – evarūpo asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Appayogena lahusāya gatiyā parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā vipule tiṇakaṭṭhapuñje patitvā taṃ vipulaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhapuñjaṃ jhāpetvā nibbāyati – evarūpo sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Sappayogena alahusāya gatiyā parinibbāyanato. Aparā mahantesu tiṇakaṭṭhapuñjesu patati, tattha mahantesu tiṇakaṭṭhapuñjesu jhāyamānesu vītaccitaṅgāro vā jālā vā uppatitvā kammārasālaṃ jhāpetvā gāmanigamanagararaṭṭhaṃ jhāpetvā samuddantaṃ patvā nibbāyati – evarūpo uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā? Anekabhavabījavipphāraṃ phussa phussa byantīkatvā parinibbāyanato. Yasmā pana ārakaṇṭakādibhedaṃ khuddakampi mahantampi ayokapālameva, tasmā sutte sabbavāresu ayokapālantveva vuttaṃ (a. ni. 7.55). Yathāha –
“诸比丘,此处有比丘如是行道:‘如果没有我,没有我所;将不存在,将没有我所。凡是存在的、凡是已生的,我皆舍断。’他获得舍。他对‘有’不贪染,对‘生起’不贪染,以正慧照见最上寂静句。然而,他尚未完全体证彼句,尚未彻底断除慢随眠、有贪随眠、无明随眠。他由五下分结的灭尽,成为中般涅槃者。诸比丘,犹如在连日晒热的铁砧上锤击时,有火花迸出即灭;同样地,有比丘如此行道:‘如果没有我……’乃至……成为中般涅槃者。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – ‘no cassa, no ca me siyā, na bhavissati, na me bhavissati, yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahāmī’’’ti upekkhaṃ paṭilabhati. So bhave na rajjati, sambhave na rajjati, atthuttari padaṃ santaṃ sammappaññāya passati. Tañca khvassa padaṃ na sabbena sabbaṃ sacchikataṃ hoti. Tassa na sabbena sabbaṃ mānānusayo pahīno hoti, na sabbena sabbaṃ bhavarāgānusayo pahīno hoti, na sabbena sabbaṃ avijjānusayo pahīno hoti. So pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā antarāparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho , bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti.
复次,诸比丘,此处有比丘如是行道:“若没有我……”……乃至……成为中般涅槃者。诸比丘,就像在连日晒热的铁砧上锤击时,有火花迸出,跃起而灭;正是如此,诸比丘,有比丘如是行道:“若没有我……”……乃至……成为中般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti.
复次,诸比丘,此处有比丘如是行道:“若没有我……”……乃至……成为中般涅槃者。诸比丘,就像在连日晒热的铁砧上锤击时,有火花迸出,跃起后未触地便熄灭;同样地,诸比丘,有比丘如是行道:“若没有我……”……乃至……成为中般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā anupahacca talaṃ nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti.
复次,诸比丘,此处有比丘如是行道:“若没有我……”……乃至……成为触地般涅槃者。诸比丘,就像在连日晒热的铁砧上锤击时,有火花迸出,跃起后触地而熄灭;同样地,诸比丘,有比丘如是行道:“若没有我……”……乃至……成为触地般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… upahaccaparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā upahacca talaṃ nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… upahaccaparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,于此,有比丘如此行道——他无有……(中略)……成为无行般涅槃者。比丘们,正如白天烧热的铁板被敲打时,火星飞迸而起,落在小草堆或木柴堆上,它在彼处生起火,也生起烟,生起烟火之后,将那堆小草或木柴燃尽,便无食而熄灭。同样地,比丘们,有比丘如此行道——他无有……(中略)……成为无行般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā paritte tiṇapuñje vā kaṭṭhapuñje vā nipateyya, sā tattha aggimpi janeyya, dhūmampi janeyya, aggimpi janetvā dhūmampi janetvā tameva parittaṃ tiṇapuñjaṃ vā kaṭṭhapuñjaṃ vā pariyādiyitvā anāhārā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,于此,有比丘如此行道——他无有……(中略)……成为有行般涅槃者。比丘们,正如白天烧热的铁板被敲打时,火星飞迸而起,落在大草堆或木柴堆上,它在彼处生起火……(中略)……将那堆大草或木柴燃尽,便无食而熄灭。同样地,比丘们,有比丘如此行道——他无有……(中略)……成为有行般涅槃者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā vipule tiṇapuñje vā kaṭṭhapuñje vā nipateyya, sā tattha aggimpi janeyya…pe… tameva vipulaṃ tiṇapuñjaṃ vā kaṭṭhapuñjaṃ vā pariyādiyitvā anāhārā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,于此,有比丘如此行道——他无有……(中略)……成为上流至色究竟天者。比丘们,正如白天烧热的铁板被敲打时,火星飞迸而起,落在大草堆或木柴堆上,它在彼处生起火……(中略)……将那堆大草或木柴燃尽之后,又延烧至草丛、烧至树林,烧过草丛、烧过树林之后,到达翠绿之地、道路处、岩石处、水边或悦意之地,便无食而熄灭。同样地,比丘们,有比丘如此行道——他无有……(中略)……成为上流至色究竟天者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā uddhaṃsoto hoti akaniṭṭhagāmī. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā mahante tiṇapuñje vā kaṭṭhapuñje vā nipateyya, sā tattha aggimpi janeyya…pe… tameva mahantaṃ tiṇapuñjaṃ vā kaṭṭhapuñjaṃ vā pariyādiyitvā gacchampi daheyya, dāyampi daheyya , gacchampi dahitvā dāyampi dahitvā haritantaṃ vā pathantaṃ vā selantaṃ vā udakantaṃ vā ramaṇīyaṃ vā bhūmibhāgaṃ āgamma anāhārā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā uddhaṃsoto hoti akaniṭṭhagāmī’’ti (a. ni. 7.55).
41-44 第四十一至四十四节。关于为证入流果而行道等的解说,意义自明。此处所说“此人名为阿罗汉”,应知有十二种阿罗汉。何以故?有三种解脱:空解脱、无相解脱、无愿解脱。其中,以空解脱而得解脱的漏尽者,依行道有四种;同样,以无相解脱、无愿解脱而得解脱的也各有四种——如此应知有十二种阿罗汉。如同这十二种阿罗汉,同样有十二种一来者、二十四种入流者、四十八种不还者。这些众生从此处解脱后,不再生于外道,唯在一切知佛陀的教法中出生。显示巴利原文
41-44. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannādiniddesā uttānatthāva. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo arahāti ettha pana dvādasa arahanto veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Tayo hi vimokkhā – suññato, animitto, appaṇihitoti. Tattha suññatavimokkhena vimuttakhīṇāsavo paṭipadāvasena catubbidho hoti; tathā animittaappaṇihitavimokkhehīti – evaṃ dvādasa arahanto veditabbā. Iti ime dvādasa arahanto viya dvādaseva sakadāgāmino, catuvīsati sotāpannā, aṭṭhacattālīsa anāgāminoti ettakā puggalā ito muccitvā bahiddhā nuppajjanti, imasmiññeva sabbaññubuddhasāsane uppajjantīti.
二法解说注显示巴利原文
2. Dukaniddesavaṇṇanā
45 第四十五节。在二法解说中,“忿怒者”指具有忿怒习性、大忿怒的人。为了依法显示此人,经中以设问的方式说“其中,什么是忿怒?”等。在怨恨者等的解说中,也采用同样的方法。“忿怒、恼怒”等词的意义,如前已说。同样,在怨恨者等的解说中,有“先前的忿怒”等词。“此忿怒未断”是指这些程度的忿怒,并未由镇伏断、彼分断或正断所断除。对于其他的怨恨等,也以同样的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
45. Dukaniddese kodhanoti kujjhanasīlo mahākodho. Evaṃ puggalaṃ pucchitvāpi dhammena puggalaṃ dassetuṃ tattha katamo kodhotiādimāha. Upanāhīniddesādīsupi eseva nayo. Kodho kujjhanātiādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva. Tathā upanāhīniddesādīsu pubbakālaṃ kodhotiādīni. Ayaṃ kodho appahīnoti ayaṃ ettako kodho vikkhambhanappahānena vā tadaṅgappahānena vā samucchedappahānena vā appahīno. Parato upanāhādīsupi eseva nayo.
53 第53节。在无惭者等的解说中——“以此无惭”是说具足这类无惭法。“以此无愧”等解说,也依同样的方式理解。显示巴利原文
53. Ahirikaniddesādīsu – iminā ahirikenāti iminā evaṃpakārena ahirikadhammena samannāgato. Iminā anottappenātiādīsupi eseva nayo.
63 第63节。“内结”指内在的结缚。“外结”指外在的结缚。这两者都应以牛犊舍的譬喻来说明。在牛犊舍中,受内结所缚、卧于内的牛犊,如同住于此处的入流者与一来者。因为他们的结缚在此,他们自身也居于此。受内结所缚,却卧于外的牛犊,如同居于色界、无色界中的入流者与一来者。因为他们的结缚在此,但自身却住在梵天界。受外结所缚、卧于外的牛犊,如同居于色界、无色界中的不还者。因为他的结缚在外,自身也在外。受外结所缚,却卧于内的牛犊,如同住于此处的阿那含。因为他的结缚在色界、无色界,但自身却居于此。显示巴利原文
63.Ajjhattasaṃyojanoti ajjhattabandhano. Bahiddhāsaṃyojanoti bahiddhābandhano. Te ubhopi vacchakasālūpamāya dīpetabbā. Vacchakasālāya hi anto baddho antoyeva sayitavacchako viya idhaṭṭhakasotāpannasakadāgāmino. Tesañhi bandhanampi idheva, sayampi idheva. Anto baddho pana bahi sayitavacchako viya rūpārūpabhave sotāpannasakadāgāmino. Tesañhi bandhanameva idha, sayaṃ pana brahmaloke ṭhitā. Bahi baddho bahi sayitavacchako viya rūpārūpabhave anāgāmī. Tassa hi bandhanampi bahiddhā, sayampi bahiddhāva. Bahi baddho pana antosayitavacchako viya idhaṭṭhakaanāgāmī. Tassa hi bandhanaṃ rūpārūpabhavesu, sayaṃ pana idha ṭhito.
65 第65节。在无忿怒者等的解说中——“已断”,是通过镇伏断、彼分断,或是正断而予以断除的。显示巴利原文
65. Akkodhananiddesādīsu – pahīnoti vikkhambhanappahānena vā, tadaṅgappahānena vā, samucchedappahānena vā pahīno.
83 在“难得者”的解说中——“难得”即非容易得到。“先作者”指首先行动者。“知恩者”指知道他人所作之恩,并令其明了、显著。这应通过在家者与出家者来说明。于在家者中,父母名为先作者;子女们照顾父母,对他们行问讯等事,名为知恩者。于出家者中,戒师与依止师名为先作者;弟子与共住者照顾戒师与依止师,对他们行问讯等事,名为知恩者。为阐明此义,应讲述奉养依止师的索纳长老等故事。显示巴利原文
83. Dullabhaniddese – dullabhāti na sulabhā. Pubbakārīti paṭhamameva kārako. Katavedīti kataṃ vedeti, viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti. Te agāriyānagāriyehi dīpetabbā. Agāriyesu hi mātāpitaro pubbakārino nāma. Puttadhītaro pana mātāpitaro paṭijaggantā abhivādanādīni tesaṃ kurumānā katavedino nāma. Anagāriyesu ācariyupajjhāyā pubbakārino nāma. Antevāsikasaddhivihārikā ācariyupajjhāye paṭijaggantā abhivādanādīni tesaṃ kurumānā katavedino nāma. Tesaṃ āvibhāvatthāya upajjhāyaposakasoṇattherādīnaṃ vatthūni kathetabbāni.
另有解释:不期待他人对自己有恩,而先行施恩者,为“先作者”,譬如父母、戒师与依止师。这样的人稀有难得,因为众生被渴爱所制伏。对于他人所施之恩,能随顺而行,知恩、觉恩,是为知恩报恩者。譬如能对父母、戒师、依止师如法而行者。这些人同样稀有难得,因为众生被无明所制伏。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – parena akateyeva upakāre attani kataṃ upakāraṃ anapekkhitvā kārako pubbakārī, seyyathāpi mātāpitaro ceva ācariyupajjhāyā ca. So dullabho; sattānaṃ taṇhābhibhūtattā. Parena katassa upakārassa anurūpappavattiṃ attani kataṃ upakāraṃ upakārato jānanto, vediyanto, kataññukatavedī. Seyyathāpi mātāpituācariyupajjhāyesu sammā paṭipanno. Sopi dullabho; sattānaṃ avijjābhibhūtattā.
又有:无条件的慈爱者,是先作者;有条件的慈爱者,是知恩报恩者。不期待“他将为我做”等回报而行者,是先作者;期待“他将为我做”等回报而行者,是知恩报恩者。从暗就明者,是先作者;从明就明者,是知恩报恩者。说法者,是先作者;行道者,是知恩报恩者。于天世间中,阿拉汉、正自觉者为先作者;圣弟子为知恩报恩者。而在《双集注》中仅说:“‘先作者’即先作恩惠者,‘知恩报恩者’即知其所作之恩而后行恩者。此二者中,先作者生起‘我放债’之想,后作者生起‘我消债’之想。”显示巴利原文
Apica – akāraṇavacchalo pubbakārī, sakāraṇavacchalo kataññukatavedī. ‘Karissati me’ti evamādikāraṇanirapekkhakiriyo pubbakārī. ‘Karissati me’ti evamādikāraṇasāpekkhakiriyo kataññukatavedī. Tamojotiparāyaṇo pubbakārī, jotijotiparāyaṇo kataññukatavedī. Desetā pubbakārī, paṭipajjitā kataññukatavedī. Sadevake loke arahaṃ sammāsambuddho pubbakārī, ariyasāvako kataññukatavedīti. Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.120) pana – ‘‘‘pubbakārī’ti paṭhamaṃ upakārassa kārako, ‘kataññukatavedī’ti tena kataṃ ñatvā pacchā kārako. Tesu pubbakārī iṇaṃ demīti saññaṃ karoti, pacchākārako ‘iṇaṃ jīrāpemī’ti saññaṃ karotī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ.
84 84. 在“难满足者”的解释中——“难满足者”,即无法满足者,不能被任何人所满足。若有人依止护持者之家或亲戚之家而住,当衣破损时,将他人所给的衣服搁置不用,不加受用;即使一再获得,也只是拿起搁置。又有人以同样的方式,将所得之物一再舍弃、转施他人;即使一再获得,也依然如此。这两种人,即使以车载来资具,也不能令他们满足,因此称为难满足者。显示巴利原文
84. Duttappayaniddese – duttappayāti atappayā, na sakkā kenaci tappetuṃ. Yo hi upaṭṭhākakulaṃ vā ñātikulaṃ vā nissāya vasamāno cīvare jiṇṇe tehi dinnaṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipati, na paribhuñjati. Punappunaṃ dinnampi gahetvā nikkhipateva. Yo ca teneva nayena laddhaṃ laddhaṃ vissajjeti parassa deti. Punappunaṃ laddhampi tatheva karoti. Ime dve puggalā sakaṭehipi paccaye upanentena tappetuṃ na sakkāti duttappayā nāma.
85 85. 在“易满足者”的解释中——“不施舍者”:即不为自己受用,也不给予他人。然而若有多余,则不搁置,而给予他人。这是说:若有比丘从护持者之家或亲戚之家得到旧衣布料,做成衣服而受用,不搁置不用;即使系上门闩而穿着,当再次给予时,也不轻易接受。又有一种人,将所得之物自己受用,不给予他人。这两种人,容易令他们满足,因此称为易满足者。显示巴利原文
85. Sutappayaniddese – na vissajjetīti attano akatvā parassa na deti. Atireke pana sati na nikkhipati parassa deti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo pana bhikkhu upaṭṭhākakulā vā ñātikulā vā jiṇṇacīvaro sāṭakaṃ labhitvā cīvaraṃ katvā paribhuñjati, na nikkhipati; aggaḷaṃ datvā pārupantopi puna diyyamāne sahasā na paṭiggaṇhāti. Yo ca laddhaṃ laddhaṃ attanā paribhuñjati, paresaṃ na deti. Ime dvepi sukhena sakkā tappetunti sutappayā nāmāti.
86 86. “漏”,即烦恼。“于不应追悔处追悔者”:对不应追悔之事追悔。比如,得到猪肉却追悔“这是熊肉”,得到鹿肉却追悔“这是豹肉”。时间适宜却追悔“无时”,未受请却追悔“我已受请”,钵中尘垢未落却追悔“已落”,鱼肉并非为自己而作却追悔“为我而作”。“于应追悔处不追悔者”:对应追悔之事不追悔。得到熊肉却不追悔“这是猪肉”……鱼肉已为自己而作,却不追悔“为我而作”。而在《增支部注》中仅说:“‘不应追悔’,即对僧团受用物不加设置、不加审查,这不应追悔,他却追悔。‘应追悔’,即对其加以设置、加以审查,他却不追悔。”对于这些人:这两种人的漏,犹如沃土中的蔓草等,日夜增长。在白分方面,得到如法的肉而只作为如法的肉受持者,名为“于不应追悔处不追悔”,应以此方法了知义理。显示巴利原文
86.Āsavāti kilesā. Na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ kukkuccāyatīti na kukkuccāyitabbayuttakaṃ kukkuccāyati. Sūkaramaṃsaṃ labhitvā acchamaṃsanti kukkuccāyati, migamaṃsaṃ, labhitvā dīpimaṃsanti kukkuccāyati. Kāle santeyeva ‘kālo natthī’ti, appavāretvāva ‘pavāritosmī’ti, patte rajasmiṃ apatiteyeva ‘patita’nti, attānaṃ uddissa macchamaṃse akateyeva ‘maṃ uddissa kata’nti kukkuccāyati. Kukkuccāyitabbaṃ na kukkuccāyatīti kukkuccāyitabbayuttakaṃ na kukkuccāyati. Acchamaṃsaṃ labhitvā sūkaramaṃsanti na kukkuccāyati…pe… attānaṃ uddissa macchamaṃse kate ‘maṃ uddissa kata’nti na kukkuccāyati . Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘‘na kukkuccāyitabba’nti saṅghabhogassa apaṭṭhapanaṃ avicāraṇaṃ na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ nāma, taṃ kukkuccāyati. ‘Kukkuccāyitabba’nti tasseva paṭṭhapanaṃ vicāraṇaṃ, taṃ na kukkuccāyatī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Imesanti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ subhūmiyaṃ tiṇalatādīni viya rattimpi divāpi āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva. Sukkapakkhe kappiyamaṃsaṃ labhitvā kappiyamaṃsantveva gaṇhanto na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ na kukkuccāyati nāmāti iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
88 “心志低劣”即志向卑劣;“戒行恶劣”即无戒;“恶法”即卑劣之法。显示巴利原文
88.Hīnādhimuttoti hīnajjhāsayo. Dussīloti nissīlo. Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo.
89 “心志良好”即志向殊胜;“善法”即吉祥法、清净法、美善法。显示巴利原文
89.Paṇītādhimuttoti paṇītajjhāsayo. Kalyāṇadhammoti bhaddakadhammo, sucidhammo, sundaradhammo.
90 满足者:即已饱足、已圆满者。能令满足者:即也能使他人满足者。在独觉佛与如来弟子中:此处,独觉佛虽以九种出世间法自得满足与圆满,却不能令他人满足,因为他的说法无法使人得证悟。而弟子说法,则能令无量天、人得证悟。然而,当弟子说法时,并非以自己的言说而说,而是以诸佛的言说而说。前来听法的会众也生起恭敬心:“这位比丘并非宣说自己所证悟的法,而是宣说诸佛所证悟的法。”如此,这份恭敬实际归属于诸佛。因此,于此情形中,唯有正自觉者才名为能令满足者。譬如,国王下令:“给某某这些物品。”物品虽由他人取来给予,但国王才是真正的施主。获得者也认为:“国王赐予我们职位,赐予我们权威与财富。”而不会认为是由那位官员所赐。应如此了知这个道理。其余各处,义理明显。显示巴利原文
90.Tittoti suhito pariyosito. Tappetāti aññesampi tittikaro. Paccekasambuddhā ye ca tathāgatasāvakāti ettha paccekabuddhā navahi lokuttaradhammehi sayaṃ tittā paripuṇṇā. Aññe pana tappetuṃ na sakkonti. Tesañhi dhammakathāya abhisamayo na hoti. Sāvakānaṃ pana dhammakathāya aparimāṇānampi devamanussānaṃ abhisamayo hoti. Evaṃ santepi yasmā pana te dhammaṃ desentā na attano vacanaṃ katvā kathenti, buddhānaṃ vacanaṃ katvā kathenti. Sotuṃ nisinnaparisāpi ‘ayaṃ bhikkhu na attanā paṭividdhadhammaṃ katheti, buddhehi paṭividdhadhammaṃ kathetī’ti cittīkāraṃ karoti. Iti so cittīkāro buddhānaṃyeva hoti. Evaṃ tattha sammāsambuddhova tappetā nāma. Yathā hi ‘asukassa nāma idañcidañca dethā’ti raññā āṇattā kiñcāpi ānetvā denti, atha kho rājāva tattha dāyako. Yehipi laddhaṃ hoti, te ‘raññā amhākaṃ ṭhānantaraṃ dinnaṃ, issariyavibhavo dinno’tveva gaṇhanti, na rājapurisehīti. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
三、三法解说显示巴利原文
3. Tikaniddesavaṇṇanā
91 91. 三法解说:恶戒者即无戒者。恶法者即卑劣法者。或者,由于戒缺失而成为恶戒者,由于见缺失而成为恶法者。由于身、语防护的破坏而成为恶戒者,由于其余防护的破坏而成为恶法者。由于行为不净而为恶戒者,由于意乐不净而为恶法者。由于缺乏善戒而为恶戒者,由于具有不善戒而为恶法者。不净,即具足不净的身业等。令人疑虑的行为,是指让他人以疑虑而忆念的行为。或者,指令他人见到不适当之事后生起这样的怀疑:“这必定是他做的”——即如此令人怀疑的行为;又或者,指自己以疑虑忆念的行为,即“有疑虑的行为”,这是它的含义。因为他在白天的集会处等地,看见比丘们聚集商议,便会想:“这些人聚在一起商议,莫非是知道了我的所作所为才商议的?”——他就是这样有疑虑的行为。显示巴利原文
91. Tikaniddese – dussīloti nissīlo. Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo. Sīlavipattiyā vā dussīlo, diṭṭhivipattiyā pāpadhammo . Kāyavacīsaṃvarabhedena dussīlo, sesasaṃvarabhedena pāpadhammo. Asuddhapayogatāya dussīlo, asuddhāsayatāya pāpadhammo. Kusalasīlavirahena dussīlo; akusalasīlasamannāgamena pāpadhammo. Asucīti asucīhi kāyakammādīhi samannāgato. Saṅkassarasamācāroti saṅkāya parehi saritabbasamācāro. Kiñcideva asāruppaṃ disvā ‘idaṃ iminā kataṃ bhavissatī’ti evaṃ parehi āsaṅkanīyasamācāro, attanoyeva vā saṅkāya saritabbasamācāro – sāsaṅkasamācāroti attho. Tassa hi divāṭṭhānādīsu sannipatitvā kiñcideva mantayante bhikkhū disvā ‘ime ekato hutvā mantenti, kacci nu kho mayā katakammaṃ jānitvā mantentī’ti evaṃ sāsaṅkasamācāro hoti.
“隐蔽业行”者,即具足应被隐藏的恶业。“非沙门而自称沙门”者,即本非沙门,却因装扮成沙门的样子而自称“我是沙门”。“非梵行者而自称梵行者”,即见到其他梵行者穿着整齐、披衣严整、手持善好钵,在村落、城镇、国土、王都中托钵维生后,自己也以那样的方式修行,从而像是在宣称“我是梵行者”。然而,在说了“我是比丘”之后进入布萨堂等处者,确实是自称梵行者;同样,接受僧团利养者也是如此。“内腐”者,即由于业已腐坏而内腐,或因无德、缺乏功德精髓而内腐。“漏泄”者,即被贪等所浸染。“如垃圾生”者,即已生起贪等垃圾。或者,“垃圾”是指带有腐尸的污水。在此教法中,所谓恶戒者,因其可厌恶性,如同带有腐尸的污水。因此,如同垃圾所生,故为“如垃圾生”。显示巴利原文
Paṭicchannakammantoti paṭicchādetabbayuttakena pāpakammena samannāgato. Assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiññoti assamaṇo hutvāva samaṇapatirūpakatāya ‘samaṇo aha’nti evaṃ paṭiñño. Abrahmacārī brahmacāripaṭiññoti aññe brahmacārino sunivatthe supārute sumbhakapattadhare gāmanigamajanapadarājadhānīsu piṇḍāya caritvā jīvikaṃ kappente disvā sayampi tādisena ākārena tathā paṭipajjanato ‘ahaṃ brahmacārī’ti paṭiññaṃ dento viya hoti. ‘Ahaṃ bhikkhū’ti vatvā uposathaggādīni pavisanto pana brahmacāripaṭiñño hotiyeva, tathā saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ gaṇhanto. Antopūtīti pūtinā kammena anto anupaviṭṭho, nigguṇatāya vā guṇasāravirahitattā antopūti. Avassutoti rāgādīhi tinto. Kasambujātoti sañjātarāgādikacavaro. Atha vā kasambu vuccati tintakuṇapagataṃ kasaṭaudakaṃ. Imasmiñca sāsane dussīlo nāma jigucchanīyattā tintakuṇapakasaṭaudakasadiso. Tasmā kasambu viya jātoti kasambujāto.
“他不会这样想”——为何他不会这样想?因为他能依止而证得阿拉汉果的那个基础已经毁坏。譬如旃陀罗童子,即使听到“某位刹帝利童子已灌顶为王”,由于他并非生于能获得灌顶的家族,便不会这样想:“我何时也能像那位刹帝利童子一样获得灌顶呢?”同样,恶戒比丘即使听到“某位比丘已证得阿拉汉果”,由于他不具备能依止而证得阿拉汉果的戒基础,便不会这样想:“我何时也能像那位具戒者一样证得阿拉汉果呢?”这种人对阿拉汉果没有期望,故称“无期望者”。显示巴利原文
Tassa na evaṃ hotīti kasmā na hoti? Yattha patiṭṭhitena sakkā bhaveyya arahattaṃ laddhuṃ, tassā patiṭṭhāya bhinnattā. Yathā hi caṇḍālakumārakassa ‘asuko nāma khattiyakumāro rajje abhisitto’ti sutvāpi, yasmiṃ kule paccājātā abhisekaṃ pāpuṇanti, tasmiṃ kule apaccājātattā na evaṃ hoti – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so khattiyakumāro viya abhisekaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti; evameva dussīlassa ‘asuko nāma bhikkhu arahattaṃ patto’ti sutvāpi, yasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitena arahattaṃ pattabbaṃ, tassa abhāvato ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so sīlavā viya arahattaṃ pāpuṇeya’nti na evaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo arahattāsāya abhāvā nirāsoti vuccati.
92 “他会这样想”——为何他会这样想?因为他能依止而证得阿拉汉果的那个基础坚固。譬如善生刹帝利童子,一听到“某位刹帝利童子已灌顶为王”,由于他生于能获得灌顶的家族,便会这样想:“我何时也能像那位童子一样获得灌顶呢?”同样,具戒者一听到“某位比丘已证得阿拉汉果”,由于他能依止而证得阿拉汉果的戒基础坚固,便会这样想:“我何时也能像那位比丘一样证得阿拉汉果呢?”这种人被称为“有期望者”。因为他期望、希求阿拉汉果,故称“有期望者”。显示巴利原文
92.Tassa evaṃ hotīti kasmā hoti? Yasmiṃ patiṭṭhitena sakkā bhaveyya arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ, tassā patiṭṭhāya thirattā. Yathā hi sujātassa khattiyakumārassa ‘asuko nāma khattiyakumāro rajje abhisitto’ti sutvāva yasmiṃ kule paccājātā abhisekaṃ pāpuṇanti, tasmiṃ paccājātassa evaṃ hoti – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi, so kumāro viya abhisekaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti evameva sīlavato ‘asuko nāma bhikkhu arahattaṃ patto’ti sutvāva yasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitena arahattaṃ pattabbaṃ, tassā patiṭṭhāya thirattā – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so bhikkhu viya arahattaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti evaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo āsaṃso nāma vuccati. So hi arahattaṃ āsaṃsati patthetīti āsaṃso.
93 “他先前未解脱时”——即那位漏尽者先前未证得阿拉汉解脱时,曾有的解脱期望,现已止息,因此他不会这样想。譬如已灌顶的刹帝利,听到“某位刹帝利童子已灌顶为王”,由于不存在两个王位灌顶、两把白伞盖,便不会这样想:“我何时也能像那位童子一样获得灌顶呢?”同样,漏尽者听到“某位比丘已证得阿拉汉果”,由于不存在两个阿拉汉果,便不会这样想:“我何时也能像那位比丘一样证得阿拉汉果呢?”这种人对阿拉汉果的期望已消失,故称“离期望者”。显示巴利原文
93.Yā hissa pubbe avimuttassāti yā tassa khīṇāsavassa pubbe arahattavimuttiyā avimuttassa vimuttāsā ahosi, sā paṭippassaddhā, tasmā na evaṃ hoti. Yathā hi abhisittassa khattiyassa ‘asuko nāma khattiyakumāro rajje abhisitto’ti sutvā ekassa rañño dvinnaṃ rajjābhisekānaṃ dvinnaṃ setacchattānaṃ abhāvā na evaṃ hoti – ‘‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so kumāro viya abhisekaṃ pāpuṇeyya’’nti; evameva khīṇāsavassa ‘asuko nāma bhikkhu arahattaṃ patto’ti sutvā, dvinnaṃ arahattānaṃ abhāvā – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so bhikkhu viya arahattaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti na evaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāsoti vuccati.
94 第九十四条 在解释“病者譬喻”时——为了阐明被称为“病者譬喻”的比喻,首先说“有三种病人”等。其中,“适宜的”指有益、能带来增长;“适当的”指合适的。“不能从该病中痊愈”,以此说明被不治之症如风病等所缠、已达终点的病人。“能从该病中痊愈”,以此说明患有轻微疾病如疥疮、草花病、老病等种种小病者。显示巴利原文
94. Gilānūpamaniddese – yāya upamāya te gilānūpamāti vuccanti, taṃ tāva upamaṃ dassetuṃ tayo gilānātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sappāyānīti hitāni vuddhikarāni. Patirūpanti anucchavikaṃ. Neva vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhāti iminā atekicchena vātāpamārādinā rogena samannāgato niṭṭhappatto gilāno kathito. Vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhāti iminā khipitakacchutiṇapupphakajarādippabhedo appamattakābādho kathito.
“获得适宜的食物”与“未获得”——以此说明所有通过护理便能安适的疾病。此中所谓的“适当的看护者”,应知是具备照料病人所需的要素、贤明、能干、不懒惰者。显示巴利原文
Labhantosappāyāni bhojanāni no alabhantoti iminā pana yesaṃ paṭijagganena phāsukaṃ hoti, sabbepi te ābādhā kathitā. Ettha ca patirūpo upaṭṭhāko nāma gilānupaṭṭhākaaṅgehi samannāgato paṇḍito dakkho analaso veditabbo.
“Gilānupaṭṭhāko anuññāto”意为“已由比丘僧团允许指派的看护者”。当那位病人因自身状况无法自理时,比丘僧团应以白二甘马指派一位比丘和一位沙弥给他,说:“你们去照顾此人。”在照料期间,病人与那两人所需的一切,皆由比丘僧团提供。另外两位病人也应得到照顾。是什么原因呢?因为即使已证得究竟的病人,若无人照顾,可能会心生嗔恚:“如果他们照顾我,我会安乐,但他们却不照顾我。”由此堕入恶趣。若被照顾,他则会想:“比丘僧团应做的都已做了,只是我的业报如此。”从而对比丘僧团生起慈心,投生天界。至于患轻微疾病者,无论是否得到药物都能痊愈,其病即使不用药也能平息,但用药后能更快平息,由此他便能学习佛语或修习沙门法。以此原因,说其他病人也应得到照顾。显示巴利原文
Gilānupaṭṭhāko anuññātoti ‘bhikkhusaṅghena dātabbo’ti anuññāto. Tasmiñhi gilāne attano dhammatāya yāpetuṃ asakkonte bhikkhusaṅghena tassa bhikkhuno ‘eko bhikkhu ca sāmaṇero ca imaṃ paṭijaggathā’ti apaloketvā dātabbā. Yāva pana te taṃ paṭijagganti, tāva gilānassa ca tesañca dvinnaṃ yenattho sabbaṃ bhikkhusaṅghasseva bhāro. Aññepi gilānā upaṭṭhātabbāti itarepi dve gilānā upaṭṭhātabbā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Yopi hi niṭṭhappattagilāno, so anupaṭṭhiyamāno ‘sace maṃ paṭijaggeyyuṃ, phāsukaṃ me bhaveyya, na kho pana maṃ paṭijaggantī’ti manopadosaṃ katvā apāye nibbatteyya. Paṭijaggiyamānassa pana evaṃ hoti – ‘bhikkhusaṅghena yaṃ kattabbaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ kataṃ, mayhaṃ pana kammavipāko īdiso’ti so bhikkhusaṅghe mettaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā sagge nibbattati. Yo pana appamattakena byādhinā samannāgato labhantopi alabhantopi vuṭṭhātiyeva, tassa vināpi bhesajjena vūpasamanakabyādhi bhesajje kate khippataraṃ vūpasammati. Tato so buddhavacanaṃ vā uggaṇhituṃ samaṇadhammaṃ vā kātuṃ sakkhissati. Iminā kāraṇena aññepi gilānā upaṭṭhātabbāti vuttaṃ.
“Neva okkamatīti”意为“不进入”,即不进入善法中的决定道,所谓善法中的“正性决定”即指道决定。此句描述了“句最上者”这类人。第二句则摄“略解知者”,如同教法中那拉卡长老那样的人:在佛间隔期间,他曾在独觉佛跟前获得一次教诫,便证悟了辟支菩提智。第三句描述了“广解知者”。而“引导者”则依止于他。显示巴利原文
Neva okkamatīti neva pavisati. Niyāmaṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu magganiyāmasaṅkhātaṃ sammattaṃ. Iminā padaparamo puggalo kathito. Dutiyavārena ugghaṭitaññū gahito sāsane nāḷakattherasadiso . Buddhantare ekavāraṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ santike ovādaṃ labhitvā paṭividdhapaccekabodhiñāṇo ca. Tatiyavārena vipañcitaññū puggalo kathito. Neyyo pana tannissitova hoti.
“Dhammadesanā anuññātāti”意为“允许说法”,即允许每月八次说法。也应对其他人说法,即也应向其他人讲法。原因何在?因为对于句最上者,即使在此生不能证悟法,也能成为未来的因缘。至于那种无论是否得见如来的色身、无论是否得以听闻法与律都能证悟法的人,若不得闻则暂时不能证悟,若得闻则能迅速证悟,以此缘故,应向他们说法。对于第三种人,则应反复说法。身证者、见至者、信解脱者,前文已述。显示巴利原文
Dhammadesanā anuññātāti māsassa aṭṭha vāre dhammakathā anuññātā. Aññesampi dhammo desetabboti itaresampi dhammo kathetabbo. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Padaparamassa hi imasmiṃ attabhāve dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ asakkontassāpi anāgate paccayo bhavissati. Yo pana tathāgatassa rūpadassanaṃ labhantopi alabhantopi dhammavinayañca savanāya labhantopi alabhantopi dhammaṃ abhisameti; so alabhanto na tāva abhisameti, labhanto pana khippameva abhisamessatīti iminā kāraṇena tesaṃ dhammo desetabbo. Tatiyassa pana punappunaṃ desetabbova. Kāyasakkhidiṭṭhappattasaddhāvimuttā heṭṭhā kathitāyeva.
98 98. 关于“粪语者”等——“sabhaggato”指处于会堂中。“parisaggato”指处于村众集会中。“ñātimajjhagato”指处于亲属中间。“pūgamajjhagato”指处于行会中间。“rājakulamajjhagato”指处于王族中间的大裁决处。“abhinīto”指被带去询问。“sakkhipuṭṭho”指被当作证人而询问。“ehambho purisā”是称呼语。“attahetu vā parahetu vā”指为了自己或他人,或因手足等,或因财物。“āmisakiñcikkhahetu vā”中,“āmisa”指利养,“kiñcikkha”指任何微少之物,乃至为了一小块鹧鸪肉、鹌鹑肉、酥油团、生酥团等微少贿赂。“sampajānamusā bhāsitā hotī”指明知而故意说妄语。“ayaṃ vuccatīti”指此人因其言语如粪,故称为“粪语者”。正如粪便不为大众所喜、不爱,此人的言语亦不为诸天与人类所喜、不爱。显示巴利原文
98. Gūthabhāṇīādīsu – sabhaggatoti sabhāyaṃ ṭhito. Parisaggatoti gāmaparisāya ṭhito. Ñātimajjhagatoti dāyādānaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Pūgamajjhagatoti seṇīnaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Rājakulamajjhagatoti rājakulassa majjhe mahāvinicchaye ṭhito. Abhinītoti pucchanatthāya nīto. Sakkhipuṭṭhoti sakkhiṃ katvā pucchito. Ehambho purisāti ālapanametaṃ. Attahetu vā parahetu vāti attano vā parassa vā hatthapādādihetu vā dhanahetu vā. Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vāti ettha āmisanti lābho adhippeto. Kiñcikkhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ. Antamaso tittiravaṭṭakasappipiṇḍanavanītapiṇḍādiappamattakassāpi lañjassa hetūti attho. Sampajānamusā bhāsitā hotīti jānantoyeva musāvādaṃ kattā hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo gūthasadisavacanattā gūthabhāṇīti vuccati. Yathā hi gūthaṃ nāma mahājanassa aniṭṭhaṃ hoti akantaṃ; evameva imassa puggalassa vacanaṃ devamanussānaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ hoti akantaṃ.
99 ‘Ayaṃ vuccatīti’:这种人因其言语如花,故称为‘花语者’。恰如盛开的夏生花或无忧花为众人所喜爱、所悦意,此人的言语亦为诸天与人类所喜爱、所悦意。显示巴利原文
99.Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo pupphasadisavacanattā pupphabhāṇīti vuccati. Yathā hi phullāni vassikāni vā adhimuttakāni vā mahājanassa iṭṭhāni kantāni honti; evameva imassa puggalassa vacanaṃ devamanussānaṃ iṭṭhaṃ hoti kantaṃ.
100 ‘Nelā’:‘ela’意为过失,没有过失便是‘nelā’,即无过失,如同‘nelaṅgo setapacchādo’中的‘nela’那样。‘kaṇṇasukhā’:因音韵柔和而令耳愉悦,不会像针刺般产生耳痛。‘pemanīyā’:因义理柔和,不令全身生嗔,而令生喜爱。‘hadayaṅgamā’:无障碍地进入心中,安乐入于心。‘porī’:因功德圆满而称‘porī’,也指如城市中成长的女子般柔和;或指属于城市,即城市居民的话语。城市居民的话语是恰当的——称父为父,称母为母,称兄为兄。这样的话语为众人所喜爱,故为‘bahujanakantā’。既为众人喜爱,也为众人悦意、令心增长,即‘bahujanamanāpā’。‘Ayaṃ vuccatīti’:这种人称为‘蜜语者’,也有异读作‘柔软说者’,两者皆意为言语甜美。正如四种甘味是甜美、殊胜的,此人的言语亦为诸天与人类所感甜美。显示巴利原文
100.Nelāti elaṃ vuccati doso. Nāssā elanti nelā. Niddosāti attho, ‘‘nelaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti (udā. 65) ettha vuttanelaṃ viya. Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā. Sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sakalasarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetīti pemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati appaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatīti hadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavāti porī. Pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārātipi porī. Purassa esātipi porī. Nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti. Pitimattaṃ pitāti, mātimattaṃ mātāti, bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotīti bahujanakantā. Bahujanassa kantabhāveneva bahuno janassa manāpā cittavuddhikarāti bahujanamanāpā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo madhubhāṇīti vuccati. Mudubhāṇītipi pāṭho. Ubhayatthāpi madhuravacanoti attho. Yathā hi catumadhuraṃ nāma madhuraṃ paṇītaṃ; evameva imassa puggalassa vacanaṃ devamanussānaṃ madhuraṃ hoti.
101 关于疮譬喻心等:‘abhisajjati’意为执着。‘kuppati’意为因愤怒而激怒。‘byāpajjati’意为舍弃正常状态,变得腐败。‘patitthīyati’意为变得僵硬、顽固。‘kopa’指微弱的愤怒。‘dosa’指因恶意而比前者更强烈的愤怒。‘appaccaya’指不悦、忧恼。‘duṭṭhāruka’指旧疮。‘kaṭṭhena’指以棍棒末端。‘kaṭhalāya’指以瓦片。‘āsavaṃ deti’意为持续不断地流出。旧疮依其自性,原本就有血液、脓液等三种流出,受到碰触时则流出更多。同样地,此处应结合譬喻:愤怒之人如同旧疮。如同旧疮依自性流出,愤怒者也依其自性,如肿胀者般暴躁而行。用棍棒或瓦片碰触,如同因微不足道的话语而更大量地流出,心想‘此人竟如此说我’,从而更加暴怒膨胀,应如此看待。‘Ayaṃ vuccati’意为:这样的人被称为‘疮譬喻心者’,即具有类似旧疮之心的人。显示巴利原文
101. Arukūpamacittādīsu – abhisajjatīti laggati. Kuppatīti kopavasena kuppati. Byāpajjatīti pakatibhāvaṃ pajahati, pūtiko hoti. Patitthīyatīti thinabhāvaṃ thaddhabhāvañca āpajjati. Kopanti dubbalakodhaṃ. Dosanti dussanavasena tato balavataraṃ. Appaccayanti atuṭṭhākāraṃ domanassaṃ. Duṭṭhārukoti purāṇavaṇo. Kaṭṭhenāti daṇḍakakoṭiyā. Kaṭhalāyāti kapālena. Āsavaṃ detīti aparāparaṃ savati. Purāṇavaṇo hi attano dhammatāya eva pubbaṃ lohitaṃ yūsanti imāni tīṇi savati , ghaṭṭito pana tāni adhikataraṃ savati. Evamevaṃ khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ, duṭṭhāruko viya hi kodhano puggalo. Tassa attano dhammatāya savanaṃ viya kodhanassapi attano dhammatāya uddhumātakassa viya caṇḍikatassa caraṇaṃ. Kaṭṭhena vā kaṭhalāya vā ghaṭṭanaṃ viya appamattakampi vacanaṃ bhiyyoso mattāya savanaṃ viya ‘mādisaṃ nāma esa evaṃ vadatī’ti bhiyyoso mattāya uddhumāyanabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo arukūpamacittoti vuccati. Purāṇavaṇasadisacittoti attho.
102 ‘rattandhakāratimisāya’是指夜晚中,因障碍眼识生起而致盲的浓密黑暗。‘vijjantarikāya’是指闪电现起的刹那。此处亦应作譬喻连结:应将明眼之人视同瑜伽行者。黑暗即如入流道所断的烦恼,闪电划过即如入流道智的生起。在闪电的刹那,明眼之人得见周围之色;同样地,于入流道的刹那见涅槃。黑暗再次笼罩,即如斯陀含道所断的烦恼;闪电再次划过,即如斯陀含道智的生起。在闪电的刹那,明眼之人得见周围之色;同样地,于斯陀含道的刹那见涅槃。黑暗再次笼罩,即如阿那含道所断的烦恼;闪电再次划过,即如阿那含道智的生起。在闪电的刹那,明眼之人得见周围之色,当知即如于阿那含道的刹那见涅槃。‘ayaṃ vuccati’意为:此人即称为‘闪电譬喻心者’,意思是具有如同闪电般短暂光明的心。显示巴利原文
102.Rattandhakāratimisāyāti rattiṃ cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇena andhabhāvakaraṇe bahalatame. Vijjantarikāyāti vijjuppattikkhaṇe. Idhāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – cakkhumā puriso viya hi yogāvacaro daṭṭhabbo. Andhakāraṃ viya sotāpattimaggavajjhā kilesā. Vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya sotāpattimaggañāṇassa uppattikālo. Vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa sāmantā rūpadassanaṃ viya sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ. Puna andhakārāvattharaṇaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggavajjhā kilesā. Puna vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggañāṇassa uppādo. Vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa sāmantā rūpadassanaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ. Puna andhakārāvattharaṇaṃ viya anāgāmimaggavajjhā kilesā. Puna vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya anāgāmimaggañāṇassa uppādo. Vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa sāmantā rūpadassanaṃ viya anāgāmimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo vijjūpamacittoti vuccati. Ittarakālobhāsena vijjusadisacittoti attho.
103 在金刚譬喻心中,亦应作譬喻连结:金刚应视同阿罗汉道智。宝石团与石块即如阿罗汉道所断的烦恼。金刚穿透宝石团或石块之后,无处可去,即如阿罗汉道智所断的烦恼不复存在。金刚穿透之后不再填补,即如阿罗汉道所断的烦恼不再生起,应如此了解。‘ayaṃ vuccati’意为:此人即称为‘金刚譬喻心者’,意思是具有如金刚般能断除烦恼根本之能力的心。显示巴利原文
103. Vajirūpamacittatāyapi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – vajiraṃ viya hi arahattamaggañāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Maṇigaṇṭhipāsāṇagaṇṭhi viya arahattamaggavajjhā kilesā. Vajirassa maṇigaṇṭhiṃ vā pāsāṇagaṇṭhiṃ vā vinivijjhitvā agamanabhāvassa natthibhāvo viya arahattamaggañāṇena acchejjānaṃ kilesānaṃ natthibhāvo. Vajirena nibbiddhavedhassa puna apaṭipūraṇaṃ viya arahattamaggena chinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ puna anuppādo daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo vajirūpamacittoti vuccati. Kilesānaṃ mūlaghātakaraṇasamatthatāya vajirena sadisacittoti attho.
104 关于盲者等:‘tathārūpaṃ cakkhu na hoti’意指没有那样种类、那样性质的慧眼。‘phātiṃ kareyya’意为令其增长、发达。‘sāvajjānavajje’指有罪过与无罪过。‘hīnappaṇīte’指低劣与殊胜。‘kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge’指黑与白,因相互排斥而成为对立面,故称为有对。此处简言之:能以慧眼了知‘这是善法’‘这是不善法’,于有罪无罪等也是如此。于黑白有对中,能以慧眼了知‘黑法是白法的对立’‘白法是黑法的对立’。‘tathārūpampissa cakkhu na hoti’——依此理,其余各处之义亦应了知。‘ayaṃ vuccati’意为:这样的人,因缺乏现世受用资具的慧眼,以及缺乏来世利益与清净的慧眼,故称为盲者。第二种人,因有现世受用资具的慧眼,而无来世利益与清净的慧眼,故称为独眼者。第三种人,因两者皆有,故称为双眼者。显示巴利原文
104. Andhādīsu tathārūpaṃ cakkhu na hotīti tathājātikaṃ tathāsabhāvaṃ paññācakkhu na hoti. Phātiṃ kareyyāti phītaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ kareyya. Sāvajjānavajjeti sadosaniddose. Hīnappaṇīteti adhamuttame. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgeti kaṇhasukkāyeva aññamaññapaṭibāhanato paṭipakkhavasena sappaṭibhāgāti vuccanti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – kusale dhamme ‘kusalā dhammā’ti yena paññācakkhunā jāneyya, akusale dhamme ‘akusalā dhammā’ti, sāvajjādīsupi eseva nayo. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgesu pana kaṇhadhamme ‘sukkasuppaṭibhāgā’ti, sukkadhamme ‘kaṇhasappaṭibhāgā’ti yena paññācakkhunā jāneyya. Tathārūpampissa cakkhu na hotīti iminā nayena sesaṭṭhānesupi attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo diṭṭhadhammikabhogasaṃharaṇapaññācakkhuno ca samparāyikatthasodhanapaññācakkhuno ca abhāvā andhoti vuccati. Dutiyo diṭṭhadhammikabhogasaṃharaṇapaññācakkhuno bhāvā, samparāyikatthasodhanapaññācakkhuno pana abhāvā ekacakkhūti vuccati. Tatiyo dvinnampi bhāvā dvicakkhūti vuccati.
107 于“倒覆慧”等之中,“说法”(dhammaṃ desenti)是指:近事男为听法而来,放下自身事务而为说法。“初善”(ādikalyāṇaṃ)是指:在开头便善妙、吉祥、没有过失、没有瑕疵地说法。其余文句也同理。此处,“初”指前导安立,“中”指说法中间,“后”指结说。如此说法时,前导安立也善妙、吉祥、无过失而说,中间也如此,结尾也如此。在这里,既有说法之初中后,也有教法之初中后。其中,先说说法:在四句偈中,第一句为初,两句为中,末句为后。在单一连贯经中,缘起为初,连贯为中,“此是所说”的结语为后。在多重连贯经中,第一连贯为初,其后的一个或多个为中,最后一连贯为后。这便是说法之理。显示巴利原文
107. Avakujjapaññādīsu dhammaṃ desentīti upāsako dhammassavanatthāya āgatoti attano kammaṃ pahāya dhammaṃ desenti. Ādikalyāṇanti ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjaṃ niddosaṃ katvā desenti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha pana ādīti pubbapaṭṭhapanā. Majjhanti kathāvemajjhaṃ. Pariyosānanti sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Itissa dhammaṃ kathentā pubbapaṭṭhapanepi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā kathenti, vemajjhepi, pariyosānepi. Ettha ca atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānāni, atthi sāsanassa. Tattha desanāya tāva – catuppadikagāthāya paṭhamapadaṃ ādi, dve padāni majjhaṃ, avasānapadaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Ekānusandhikasuttassa – nidānaṃ ādi, anusandhi majjhaṃ, idamavocāti appanā pariyosānaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa – paṭhamo anusandhi ādi , tato paraṃ eko vā anekā vā majjhaṃ, pacchimo pariyosānaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva desanāya nayo.
于教法中,戒为初,定为中,观为后。或定为初,观为中,道为后。或观为初,道为中,果为后。或道为初,果为中,涅槃为后。若两两合说,则戒与定为初,观与道为中,果与涅槃为后。“有义”即令具足义理而说。“有文”即令文句圆满而说。“完全圆满”即令全体圆满无缺而说。“清净”即令清净、无缠结、无结缚而说。“宣示梵行”即如此说时,宣示那最胜行所摄、包含三学的圣八支道。“不忆念初”即不忆念先前所安立的开头部分。“瓮”即陶罐。“倒置”即口朝下放置。“正如是”中,倒置之瓮应视为如倒覆慧之人;浇水之时,如得以听闻法教之时;水翻转之时,如坐于彼座却不能领解之时;水不安住之时,应知如起座后不忆持之时。“此称为”即此类人称为倒覆慧者,意为下倾之慧。显示巴利原文
Sāsanassa pana sīlaṃ ādi, samādhi majjhaṃ, vipassanā pariyosānaṃ. Samādhi vā ādi, vipassanā majjhaṃ, maggo pariyosānaṃ. Vipassanā vā ādi, maggo majjhaṃ, phalaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Maggo vā ādi, phalaṃ majjhaṃ, nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṃ . Dve dve vā kariyamāne sīlasamādhayo ādi, vipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sātthanti sātthakaṃ katvā desenti. Sabyañjananti akkharapāripūriṃ katvā desenti. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti sakalaparipuṇṇaṃ anūnaṃ katvā desenti. Parisuddhanti parisuddhaṃ nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvā desenti. Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsentīti evaṃ desentā ca seṭṭhacariyabhūtaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ pakāsenti. Neva ādiṃ manasi karotīti neva pubbapaṭṭhapanaṃ manasi karoti. Kumbhoti ghaṭo. Nikkujjoti adhomukho ṭhapito. Evamevanti ettha kumbho nikkujjo viya avakujjapañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo. Udakāsiñcanakālo viya dhammadesanāya laddhakālo. Udakassa vivaṭṭanakālo viya tasmiṃ āsane nisinnassa uggahetuṃ asamatthakālo. Udakassa asaṇṭhānakālo viya uṭṭhahitvā asallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo avakujjapaññoti vuccati. Adhomukhapaññoti attho.
108 “散落之物”是指投入的东西。“因失念而散落”是指由于忘失正念而散落。“正如是”中,膝上应视为如膝上慧之人,种种嚼食应视为种种佛语。坐着将种种嚼食放在膝上食用的时间,如同坐在那座上位领受法教的时间;起立时因失念而令嚼食散落的时间,应知如同从座位起立离去后却不忆持的时间。“此称为”即此类人称为膝上慧者,意为似膝上之慧。显示巴利原文
108.Ākiṇṇānīti pakkhittāni. Satisammosā pakireyyāti muṭṭhassatitāya vikireyya. Evamevanti ettha ucchaṅgo viya ucchaṅgapañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo. Nānākhajjakāni viya nānappakāraṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Ucchaṅge nānākhajjakāni khādantassa nisinnakālo viya tasmiṃ āsane nisinnassa uggahaṇakālo. Vuṭṭhahantassa satisammosā vikiraṇakālo viya tasmā āsanā vuṭṭhāya gacchantassa asallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ucchaṅgapaññoti vuccati. Ucchaṅgasadisapaññoti attho.
109 ‘正置’是指口朝上放置。‘安住’是指确立。在‘正如是’中,将口朝上放置的瓮视为广慧之人。注水之时,如同得闻法教之时;水安住之时,如同于彼处安坐领受之时;水不翻转之时,如同起身离去而忆持之时。‘此称为’是指这类人称为广慧者,意为广博的智慧。显示巴利原文
109.Ukkujjoti uparimukho ṭhapito. Saṇṭhātīti patiṭṭhahati. Evameva khoti ettha uparimukho ṭhapito kumbho viya puthupañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo. Udakassa āsittakālo viya desanāya laddhakālo. Udakassa saṇṭhānakālo viya tattha nisinnassa uggahaṇakālo. No vivaṭṭanakālo viya uṭṭhāya gacchantassa sallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo puthupaññoti vuccati. Vitthārikapaññoti attho.
110 在‘未离贪’等方面:如同须陀洹、斯陀含,凡夫亦于五种欲功德及三有中未离贪,然而因不具堪任性,故不被选取。譬如巧匠为求取堪任之材而入山林,并非从一开始就砍伐所有遇到的树木,而是只砍伐那些堪任材料者;同样地,在此,世尊只选取具堪任性的圣者,凡夫因不具堪任性,故不被选取,应当如此了知。‘于欲离贪’是指于五种欲功德离贪。‘于有未离贪’是指于色有、无色有未离贪。显示巴利原文
110. Avītarāgādīsu – yathā sotāpannasakadāgāmino, evaṃ puthujjanopi pañcasu kāmaguṇesu, tīsu ca bhavesu avītarāgo. Adabbatāya pana na gahito. Yathā hi cheko vaḍḍhakī dabbasambhāratthaṃ vanaṃ paviṭṭho na ādito paṭṭhāya sampattasampattarukkhe chindati, ye panassa dabbasambhārūpagā honti, teyeva chindati; evamidhāpi bhagavatā dabbajātikā ariyāva gahitā, puthujjanā pana adabbatāya na gahitāti veditabbā. Kāmesu vītarāgoti pañcasu kāmaguṇesu vītarāgo. Bhavesu avītarāgoti rūpārūpabhavesu avītarāgo.
113 在石刻等比喻中,‘随眠’是指因未断除而随眠。‘不速坏’是指不会在中间灭去,唯有经历长劫而灭。‘正如是’是指同样地,此人的嗔恚也不会在当日、次日或后日止息,而是长久持续,唯有至死方止息,这是其含义。‘此称为’是指这类人因嗔恚长久安住,如同石刻,故称为具石刻喻者。显示巴利原文
113. Pāsāṇalekhūpamādīsu – anusetīti appahīnatāya anuseti. Na khippaṃ lujjatīti na antarā nassati, kappuṭṭhāneneva nassati. Evamevanti evaṃ tassāpi puggalassa kodho na antarā punadivase vā aparadivase vā nibbāti, addhaniyo pana hoti. Maraṇeneva nibbātīti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo pāsāṇalekhā viya kujjhanabhāvena ciraṭṭhitikato pāsāṇalekhūpamoti vuccati.
114 ‘彼之嗔’者,指因微小因由忽然发怒者之嗔。‘不久’者,即不长久存续,因未断除故不随眠。譬如于地面画线,为风等所迅速磨灭;同样,彼虽忽然生嗔,亦迅速止息,此为义。‘此称为’者,即此类人因嗔恚不久住故,如地画,称为地画喻者。显示巴利原文
114.So ca khvassa kodhoti so appamattakepi kāraṇe sahasā kuddhassa kodho. Na ciranti aciraṃ appahīnatāya nānuseti. Yathā pana pathaviyaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā katalekhā vātādīhi khippaṃ nassati, evamassa sahasā uppannopi kodho khippameva nibbātīti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo pathaviyaṃ lekhā viya kujjhanabhāvena aciraṭṭhitikato pathavīlekhūpamoti vuccati.
115 ‘粗重’者,谓极粗重、伤及要害的硬语。‘粗恶’者,谓不悦耳。‘不可意’者,谓不悦心。‘和合’者,谓成为一体。‘联结’者,谓结合。‘融洽’者,谓无间。或者说——‘和合’者,于心行等中以心相会,如乳水合一,此为义。‘联结’者,于住行等身行中以身相会,如芝麻与米混杂,此为义。‘融洽’者,于诵习、问难等语行中以语相会,虽曾别离亦如亲密之友,愈发亲爱,此为义。再者——于应作之事,与他们从初即共行一事者为‘和合’;进行至中途者为‘联结’;进行至终不退者为‘融洽’,亦应了知。‘此称为’者,即此类人因迅速和合故,如水画,称为水画喻者。显示巴利原文
115.Āgāḷhenāti atigāḷhena mammacchedakena thaddhavacanena. Pharusenāti na sotasukhena. Amanāpenāti na cittasukhena. Saṃsandatīti ekībhavati. Sandhiyatīti ghaṭayati. Sammodatīti nirantaro hoti. Atha vā – saṃsandatīti cittakiriyādīsu cittena samodhānaṃ gacchati. Khīrodakaṃ viya ekībhāvaṃ upetīti attho. Sandhiyatīti ṭhānagamanādīsu kāyakiriyādīsu kāyena samodhānaṃ gacchati. Tilataṇḍulā viya missībhāvaṃ upetīti attho. Sammodatīti uddesaparipucchādīsu vacīkiriyāsu vācāya samodhānaṃ gacchati. Vippavāsagatopi piyasahāyako viya piyatarabhāvaṃ upetīti attho. Apica – kiccakaraṇīyesu tehi saddhiṃ āditova ekakiriyabhāvaṃ upagacchanto saṃsandati. Yāva majjhā pavattanto sandhiyati, yāva pariyosānā anivattanto sammodatītipi veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo udakalekhā viya khippaṃ saṃsandanato udakalekhūpamoti vuccati.
116 在粗布喻中——为说明他们何以被称为‘粗布喻’,先示其喻,故说‘三种粗布’等。其中,‘新’者,指新织成者。‘粗布’者,指麻布衣。‘色泽差’者,指褪色。‘触感苦’者,指触感粗糙。‘价值低’者,指价值不高,仅值一迦诃波那。‘中等’者,指使用程度中等。因其已超越新时,尚未至旧时,处于中间使用期,亦色泽差、触感苦、价值低。价值不高,值半个迦诃波那。至旧时,则值半个摩娑迦或一个迦迦尼迦。‘擦锅布’者,指擦黑锅的抹布。显示巴利原文
116. Potthakūpamesu – yāya upamāya te potthakūpamāti vuccanti, taṃ tāva upamaṃ dassetuṃ tayo potthakātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha navoti navavāyimo. Potthakoti sāṇavākasāṭako. Dubbaṇṇoti vivaṇṇo. Dukkhasamphassoti kharasamphasso. Appagghoti atibahuṃ agghanto kahāpaṇagghanako hoti. Majjhimoti paribhogamajjhimo. So hi navabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā jiṇṇabhāvaṃ appatto majjhe paribhogakālepi dubbaṇṇo ca dukkhasamphasso ca appagghoyeva ca hoti. Atibahuṃ agghanto aḍḍhaṃ agghati. Jiṇṇakāle pana aḍḍhamāsakaṃ vā kākaṇikaṃ vā agghati. Ukkhaliparimajjananti kāḷukkhaliparipuñchanaṃ.
“新”:指从受具足戒起,未满五夏者,即使出身年龄已六十岁,也仍属新学。“色泽差”:指身色与功德之色皆差劣。因为恶戒者坐于大众中时,缺乏威光,身色便不圆满,功德之色更不必说。“然而,凡是他的”:是指他的侍者或亲戚朋友等亲近此人者。“他们的那个”:是指他们的那种亲近,正如亲近六师外道等邪见者一般,也如亲近提婆达多的瞿迦梨迦等人一般,那种亲近长夜带来不利与痛苦。“中等”:从五夏以上直至九夏期间,称为中等。“长老”:从十夏开始,称为长老。“他们这样说”:是指他们这样说。“你的又有什么用呢”:意思是,你这愚者所说的话有何用处?“那样的”:指具有那样的性质、那样的本质,成为举罪甘马之原因的。显示巴利原文
Navoti upasampadāya pañcavassakālato heṭṭhā jātiyā saṭṭhivassopi navoyeva. Dubbaṇṇatāyāti sarīravaṇṇenapi guṇavaṇṇenapi dubbaṇṇatāya. Dussīlassa hi parisamajjhe nisinnassa nittejatāya sarīravaṇṇopi na sampajjati, guṇavaṇṇe vattabbameva natthi. Ye kho panassāti ye kho pana tassa upaṭṭhākā vā ñātimittādayo vā etaṃ puggalaṃ sevanti. Tesaṃ tanti tesaṃ puggalānaṃ cha satthāre sevantānaṃ micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ viya, devadattaṃ sevantānaṃ kokālikādīnaṃ viya ca taṃ sevanaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti. Majjhimoti pañcavassakālato paṭṭhāya yāva navavassakālā majjhimo nāma. Theroti dasavassakālato paṭṭhāya thero nāma. Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Kiṃ nu kho tuyhanti tuyhaṃ bālassa bhaṇitena ko atthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathārūpanti tathājātikaṃ tathāsabhāvaṃ ukkhepanīyakammassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ.
117 在迦尸布喻中:所谓迦尸布,是取三种棉絮,以纺成的线织成的细布。刚织成时价值不可估量;使用一段时间后,值二万或三万;老旧时则值八千或一万。显示巴利原文
117. Kāsikavatthūpamesu – kāsikavatthaṃ nāma tayo kappāsaṃsū gahetvā kantitasuttena vāyitaṃ sukhumavatthaṃ. Taṃ navavāyimaṃ anagghaṃ hoti. Paribhogamajjhimaṃ vīsampi tiṃsampi sahassāni agghati. Jiṇṇakāle pana aṭṭhapi dasapi sahassāni agghati.
“他们的那个成为”:是指他们的那种亲近,正如亲近正自觉者等人一般,那种亲近长夜带来利益与安乐。因为依靠一位正自觉者,直至寿终,得度的众生不可计数。同样,依靠舍利弗长老、大目犍连长老及其余八十位大弟子,生天的众生不可计数。直至寿终,随顺他们见解而修行的众生亦不可计数。“值得安放”:是指那位大长老所说的依于义理的话,如同迦尸布应被安放在香盒中一样,也应被安放于头顶与心间。其余内容应依前文所说来理解。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃtaṃ hotīti tesaṃ sammāsambuddhādayo sevantānaṃ viya taṃ sevanaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hoti. Sammāsambuddhañhi ekaṃ nissāya yāvajjakālā muccanakasattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi. Tathā sāriputtattheramahāmoggallānatthere avasese ca asītimahāsāvake nissāya saggaṃ gatasattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi. Yāvajjakālā tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiṃ paṭipannasattānampi pamāṇaṃ natthiyeva. Ādheyyaṃ gacchatīti tassa mahātherassa taṃ atthanissitaṃ vacanaṃ yathā gandhakaraṇḍake kāsikavatthaṃ ādhātabbataṃ ṭhapetabbataṃ gacchati, evaṃ uttamaṅge sirasmiṃ hadaye ca ādhātabbataṃ ṭhapetabbatampi gacchati. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.
118 在“易量”等中——“易量”意为容易测量的。“此处”指在此众生界中。“掉举”指具足掉举。“高慢”指如高耸的芦苇,意思是抬高虚妄的我慢而住。“轻躁”指具足以钵装饰等轻躁行为。“饶舌”指言语粗鲁。“语散乱”指言语不加节制。“不专注”指没有心一境性。“心迷乱”指心如迷乱的牛、迷乱的鹿一般迷乱。“根显露”指根门开张。这样的人称为“易量”。正如少量的水容易测量其量,同样,具足这些不善支分的人容易测量其量,因此他被称为“易量”。显示巴利原文
118. Suppameyyādīsu – sukhena pametabboti suppameyyo. Idhāti imasmiṃ sattaloke. Uddhatoti uddhaccena samannāgato. Unnaḷoti uggatanaḷo; tucchamānaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhitoti attho. Capaloti pattamaṇḍanādinā cāpallena samannāgato. Mukharoti mukhakharo. Vikiṇṇavācoti asaṃyatavacano. Asamāhitoti cittekaggatārahito. Vibbhantacittoti bhantacitto, bhantagāvībhantamigīsappaṭibhāgo. Pākaṭindriyoti vivaṭindriyo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ‘suppameyyo’ti vuccati. Yathā hi parittassa udakassa sukhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati; evameva imehi aguṇaṅgehi samannāgatassa sukhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati. Tenesa ‘suppameyyo’ti vutto.
119 “难量”意为难以测量的。不具掉举等应依上述相反之义来理解。这样的人称为“难量”。正如大海难以测量其量,同样,具足这些善支分的人难以测量其量。那样的人会被当作“是不还者呢,还是漏尽者呢”,因此他被称为“难量”。显示巴利原文
119. Dukkhena pametabboti duppameyyo. Anuddhatādīni vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbāni. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ‘duppameyyo’ti vuccati. Yathā hi mahāsamuddassa dukkhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati; evameva imehi guṇaṅgehi samannāgatassa dukkhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati. Tādiso ‘anāgāmī nu kho, khīṇāsavo nu kho’ti vattabbataṃ gacchati, tenesa ‘duppameyyo’ti vutto.
120 “不可量”意为无法测量的。正如虚空无法测量其量,同样,漏尽者也无法测量其量,因此他被称为“不可量”。显示巴利原文
120. Na sakkā pametunti appameyyo. Yathā hi ākāsassa na sakkā pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ, evaṃ khīṇāsavassa. Tenesa ‘appameyyo’ti vutto.
121 在“不应亲近”等中——“不应亲近”指不应接近。“不应交往”指不应依附。“不应承事”指不应频频坐在近处承事。在“戒等低劣”等中,应当依相对关系来理解低劣:守护五戒者,不应被守护十戒者所亲近;守护十戒者,不应被守护四遍净戒者所亲近。“除非出于怜悯,除非出于悲愍”是说,除了怜悯和悲愍之外。因为若为自身利益,便不应亲近这样的人;然而,出于怜悯与悲愍而前往接近,则是可以的。显示巴利原文
121. Na sevitabbādīsu – na sevitabboti na upasaṅkamitabbo. Na bhajitabboti na allīyitabbo. Na payirupāsitabboti na santike nisīdanavasena punappunaṃ upāsitabbo. Hīnohoti sīlenātiādīsu upādāyupādāya hīnatā veditabbā . Yo hi pañca sīlāni rakkhati, so dasa sīlāni rakkhantena na sevitabbo. Yo pana dasa sīlāni rakkhati, so catupārisuddhisīlaṃ rakkhantena na sevitabbo. Aññatra anuddayā aññatra anukampāti ṭhapetvā anuddayañca anukampañca. Attano atthāya eva hi evarūpo puggalo na sevitabbo. Anuddayānukampāvasena pana taṃ upasaṅkamituṃ vaṭṭati.
122 “相似”即相同。对于已具戒律同等者,即那些通过戒律达到相同状态的人。“我们将有戒律之谈”是指,我们这些戒律同等者,将围绕戒律本身进行谈论。“那对我们将是安乐”是指,此戒律之谈将成为我们的安乐住、快乐住。“那对我们将是持续不断”是指,即使我们谈论一整天,这谈话也会相续不断,不会中断。因为当两位持戒者中,一位讲述戒律的功德时,另一位会随喜;因此,他们的谈话既是安乐的,也是持续不断的。然而,若有一位破戒者在场,由于破戒者难以谈论戒律,便既不会有戒律之谈,也不会安乐,更不会持续不断。此理同样适用于定与慧的谈论。因为两位得定者谈论定,两位具慧者谈论慧时,即使经过了整夜或整天,他们也不会察觉。显示巴利原文
122.Sadiso hotīti samāno hoti. Sīlasāmaññagatānaṃ satanti sīlena samānabhāvaṃ gatānaṃ santānaṃ. Sīlakathā ca no bhavissatīti evaṃ samānasīlānaṃ amhākaṃ sīlameva ārabbha kathā bhavissati. Sā ca no phāsu bhavissatīti sā ca sīlakathā amhākaṃ phāsuvihāro sukhavihāro bhavissati. Sā ca no pavattinī bhavissatīti sā ca amhākaṃ kathā divasampi kathentānaṃ pavattinī bhavissati, na paṭihaññissati. Dvīsu hi sīlavantesu ekena sīlassa vaṇṇe kathite itaro anumodati; tena tesaṃ kathā phāsu ceva hoti, pavattinī ca. Ekasmiṃ pana dussīle sati dussīlassa sīlakathā dukkathāti neva sīlakathā hoti, na phāsu hoti, na pavattinī. Samādhipaññākathāsupi eseva nayo. Dve hi samādhilābhino samādhikathaṃ, sappaññā ca paññākathaṃ kathentā, rattiṃ vā divasaṃ vā atikkantampi na jānanti.
123 “恭敬尊重”即作了恭敬与尊重。“更为增上”即更为殊胜。“戒蕴”即戒的积聚。“我将圆满”意为:依靠那位戒行殊胜的人,我将使自己尚未圆满的戒蕴得以圆满。“于处处以智慧摄持”是指,避开对戒不利、无益的法,亲近对戒有利、有益的法,如是于一切处,以智慧摄持戒蕴。这便是以智慧摄持。此理同样适用于定蕴与慧蕴。显示巴利原文
123.Sakkatvā garuṃ katvāti sakkārañceva garukārañca karitvā. Adhiko hotīti atireko hoti. Sīlakkhandhanti sīlarāsiṃ. Paripūressāmīti taṃ atirekasīlaṃ puggalaṃ nissāya attano aparipūraṃ sīlarāsiṃ paripūraṃ karissāmi. Tattha tattha paññāya anuggahessāmīti ettha sīlassa asappāye anupakāradhamme vajjetvā sappāye upakāradhamme sevanto tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlakkhandhaṃ paññāya anuggaṇhāti nāma. Samādhipaññākkhandhesupi eseva nayo.
124 关于“应被厌恶”等——“应被厌恶”意为应像粪便一样被厌恶。“然而他的”意为然而他的。“名声”即言语谈论。“正是如此”在此处:应将破戒视为粪坑。破戒之人,应视为如掉入粪坑而站立者,被血管所缠缚。正如从粪坑中被拉出时,即使有蛇爬上那人的身体,也未被看见;同样,亲近破戒者时,其行为便成为原因,如同用粪便涂满身体后蛇才离开的时刻;应知亲近破戒者时,恶名声生起之时,即如蛇离开之时。显示巴利原文
124. Jigucchitabbādīsu – jigucchitabboti gūthaṃ viya jigucchitabbo. Atha kho nanti atha kho assa. Kittisaddoti kathāsaddo. Evamevanti ettha gūthakūpo viya dussīlyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gūthakūpe patitvā ṭhito dhamanīahi viya dussīlapuggalo. Guthakūpato uddhariyamānena tena ahinā purisassa sarīraṃ āruḷhenāpi adaṭṭhabhāvo viya dussīlaṃ sevamānassāpi tassa kiriyāya kāraṇabhāvo sarīraṃ gūthena makkhetvā ahino gatakālo viya dussīlaṃ sevamānassa pāpakittisaddassa abbhuggamanakālo veditabbo.
125 “柿树木炭”意为柿树木柴的炭火。“更加猛烈地发出噼啪声”意为:那炭火在燃烧时,本来就会迸出火花,发出‘噼啪’声响;而受到敲击时,则发出更猛烈的声响,这是其含义。“正是如此”意为:同样地,易怒者依其本性,本就躁动、凶暴而行。而当听到哪怕一点点言语时,便想‘竟敢对我这样的人这样说’,从而变得更加躁动、凶暴而行。“粪坑”即充满粪便的坑,或即粪堆。此处应以前述方式理解譬喻的关联。因此,对于这样的人,应保持中舍,不应亲近。因为易怒者,无论是被过度亲近、过度奉承,还是被疏远回避,都会生气;所以,应如对待草火堆一般,保持中舍,不应亲近。这是什么意思呢?若有人过度靠近草火堆取暖,其身体会被灼伤;若过度远离草火堆,则寒冷不能止息;然而,若不靠近也不远离,以中舍的态度取暖,寒冷便能止息,身体也不会被灼伤。因此,易怒之人如同草火堆,应以中舍的态度对待,不应亲近、不应交往、不应侍奉。显示巴利原文
125.Tindukālātanti tindukarukkhaalātaṃ. Bhiyyoso mattāya cicciṭāyatīti tañhi jhāyamānaṃ pakatiyāpi papaṭikāyo muñcantaṃ cicciṭāyati ciṭiciṭāti saddaṃ karoti. Ghaṭṭitaṃ pana adhimattaṃ karotīti attho. Evamevanti evamevaṃ kodhano attano dhammatāyapi uddhato caṇḍikato hutvā carati. Appamattakaṃ pana vacanaṃ vuttakāle ‘mādisaṃ nāma evaṃ vadatī’ti atirekataraṃ uddhato caṇḍikato hutvā carati. Gūthakūpoti gūthapuṇṇakūpo, gūtharāsiyeva vā. Opammasaṃsandanaṃ panettha purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tasmā evarūpo puggalo ajjhupekkhitabbo, na sevitabboti yasmā kodhano atiseviyamānopi atiupasaṅkamiyamānopi kujjhatiyeva, ‘kiṃ iminā’ti paṭikkamantopi kujjhatiyeva, tasmā palālaggi viya ajjhupekkhitabbo, na sevitabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo hi palālaggiṃ atiupasaṅkamitvā tappati, tassa sarīraṃ jhāyati. Yo atipaṭikkamitvā tappati, tassa sītaṃ na vūpasammati. Anupasaṅkamitvā apaṭikkamitvā pana majjhattabhāvena tappentassa sītaṃ vūpasammati, kāyopi na ḍayhati. Tasmā palālaggi viya kodhano puggalo majjhattabhāvena ajjhupekkhitabbo, na sevitabbo, na bhajitabbo, na payirupāsitabbo.
126 “善友”意为清净之友。“善同伴”意为清净的同伴。“同伴”意为同行者、一起行走的人。“善亲近”意为亲近善人、清净之人,即心倾向于彼、斜向于彼、朝向于彼,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
126.Kalyāṇamittoti sucimitto. Kalyāṇasahāyoti sucisahāyo. Sahāyoti sahagāmī saddhiṃcaro. Kalyāṇasampavaṅkoti kalyāṇesu sucipuggalesu sampavaṅko, tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāramānasoti attho.
127 “于戒圆满行”等者:“于戒圆满行”是说,这些圣弟子,对于作为梵行道根本、名为初梵行的四重波罗夷大戒学处,由不违犯而成办;对于微细诸戒的所犯,由能出罪而成办。在戒上,凡所应作,皆完全、彻底地实行,故称“于戒圆满行”。然而,由于未断定的障碍——欲贪与嗔恚,以及慧的障碍——覆藏真实的愚痴,即使修习定与慧,于定、慧上,他们仅依分量、依标准而作一分应作,故称“于定与慧作适量行”。依此方法,另两种情形中的义理亦应了知。显示巴利原文
127. Sīlesu paripūrakārītiādīsu – sīlesu paripūrakārinoti ete ariyasāvakā yāni tāni maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtāni, ādibrahmacariyakāni, pārājikasaṅkhātāni cattāri mahāsīlasikkhāpadāni, tesaṃ avītikkamanato yāni khuddānukhuddakāni āpajjanti, tehi ca vuṭṭhānato sīlesu yaṃ kattabbaṃ, taṃ paripūraṃ samattaṃ karontīti ‘sīlesu paripūrakārino’ti vuccanti. Samādhipāribandhakānaṃ pana kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ, paññāpāribandhakassa ca saccapaṭicchādakassa mohassa asamūhatattā, samādhiṃ paññañca bhāventāpi samādhipaññāsu yaṃ kattabbaṃ taṃ mattaso pamāṇena padesamattameva karontīti samādhismiṃ paññāya ca mattaso kārinoti vuccanti. Iminā upāyena itaresupi dvīsu nayesu attho veditabbo.
又,经中如此说:显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ aparopi suttantanayo –
“诸比丘,于此,有比丘于戒为圆满行者,于定为适度行者,于慧为适度行者。彼于微细学处,或有所犯,亦得出罪。何以故?诸比丘,于此未说彼无能力。而对于诸梵行基础、与梵行相应之戒,彼则为恒常持戒者、安住于戒者,受持学处而修学。彼断除三结,成为须陀洹,得不堕法,决定趣向正觉。复次,诸比丘,于此,有比丘于戒为圆满行者……(中略)……彼断除三结,贪瞋痴薄,成为斯陀含,唯来此世间一次,即作苦之边际。复次,诸比丘,于此,有比丘于戒为圆满行者,于定为圆满行者,于慧为适度行者。于微细学处……受持学处而修学。彼由断除五下分结……(中略)……成为化生者,于彼处般涅槃,不再从彼世间退转。复次,诸比丘,于此,有比丘于戒为圆满行者,于定为圆满行者,于慧为圆满行者。于微细学处……受持学处而修学。彼由诸漏灭尽……(中略)……现证而住。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlesu paripūrakārī hoti, samādhismiṃ mattaso kārī, paññāya mattaso kārī. So yāni tāni khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni tāni āpajjatipi, vuṭṭhātipi. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na hi mettha, bhikkhave, abhabbatā vuttā. Yāni ca kho tāni sikkhāpadāni ādibrahmacariyakāni brahmacariyasāruppāni, tattha dhuvasīlo ca hoti, ṭhitasīlo ca, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. So tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti, avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo. Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlesu…pe… so tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā, rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā, sakadāgāmī hoti; sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlesu paripūrakārī hoti, samādhismiṃ paripūrakārī, paññāya mattaso kārī. So yāni tāni…pe… sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. So pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ…pe… anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Idha pana, bhikkhave , bhikkhu sīlesu paripūrakārī, samādhismiṃ paripūrakārī, paññāya paripūrakārī. So yāni tāni khuddānukhuddakāni…pe… sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. So āsavānaṃ khayā…pe… upasampajja viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.87).
130 130. 在“导师辨别”中——“显示遍知”是指显示断除、超越。“于此”是指于这三类人。“应由此见”是指应由此教示,知彼导师为色界定之获得者,此为义。第二段亦同此理。“正自觉导师应由此见”是指由此与众外道不共之教示,应知此第三位导师为一切知佛。因为诸外道在显示对欲的遍知时,却称说色有;在显示对色的遍知时,却称说无色有;在显示对受的遍知时,却称说无想有。若要正确显示,他们“应如此显示”,却未能正确显示。然而,正自觉者以不还道显示对欲的遍知即断除;以阿罗汉道显示对色与受的遍知即断除。“这些为三导师”是指此世间中,二人为外道,一人为正自觉者——依此说为三导师。显示巴利原文
130. Satthāraniddese – pariññaṃ paññapetīti pahānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapeti. Tatrāti tesu tīsu janesu. Tena daṭṭhabboti tena paññāpanena so satthā rūpāvacarasamāpattiyā lābhīti daṭṭhabboti attho. Dutiyavārepi eseva nayo. Sammāsambuddho satthā tena daṭṭhabboti tena titthiyehi asādhāraṇena paññāpanena ayaṃ tatiyo satthā sabbaññubuddho daṭṭhabbo. Titthiyā hi kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapentā rūpabhavaṃ vakkhanti. Rūpānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapentā arūpabhavaṃ vakkhanti. Vedanānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapentā asaññabhavaṃ vakkhanti. Sammā paññapentā ‘evaṃ paññapeyyuṃ’, no ca sammā paññapetuṃ sakkonti. Sammāsambuddho pana kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ pahānaṃ anāgāmimaggena paññapeti . Rūpavedanānaṃ pariññaṃ pahānaṃ arahattamaggena paññapeti. Ime tayo satthāroti ime dve janā bāhirakā, eko sammāsambuddhoti – imasmiṃ loke tayo satthāro nāma.
131 131. 在第二种“导师辨别”中——“于现法”是指于此现有之身。“将自我宣说为真实、坚固”是指宣说“有一名为自我者,是常、恒、永恒”,将其宣说为真、为实。“及于来世”是指于未来之身,亦同样如是宣说。此处其余内容,应依前说之理而了知。显示巴利原文
131. Dutiye satthāraniddese – diṭṭhe ceva dhammeti imasmiṃ attabhāve. Attānaṃ saccato thetato paññapetīti ‘‘attā nāmeko atthi nicco dhuvo sassato’’ti bhūtato thirato paññapeti. Abhisamparāyañcāti aparasmiṃ attabhāve evameva paññapeti. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.
4. 四法解说之注释显示巴利原文
4. Catukkaniddesavaṇṇanā
132 132. 在四法解说中——‘非善士’指卑劣之人。‘杀生’即杀害生命。‘不与取’即取未给予之物。‘于欲邪行’即于诸欲中行邪行。‘妄语’即说不实之语。‘放逸于榖酒、米酒、酒类’即沉湎于榖酒、米酒、酒类之放逸。显示巴利原文
132. Catukkaniddese – asappurisoti lāmakapuriso. Pāṇaṃ atipātetīti pāṇātipātī. Adinnaṃ ādiyatīti adinnādāyī. Kāmesu micchā caratīti kāmesumicchācārī. Musā vadatīti musāvādī. Surāmerayamajjapamāde tiṭṭhatīti surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhāyī.
133 133. ‘劝令杀生’是指如同自己杀生那样,劝导他人如此执取杀生。对其余各项,道理相同。‘此被称为’是指像这样的人,由于自己以身作恶而具足恶戒,加上由劝令他人所作的恶,因而成为其半数之继承者,故称为比非善士更非善士者。‘善士’即最上之人。显示巴利原文
133.Pāṇātipāte samādapetīti yathā pāṇaṃ atipāteti, tathā naṃ tattha gahaṇaṃ gaṇhāpeti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo yasmā sayaṃ katena ca dussīlyena samannāgato yañca samādapitena kataṃ, tato upaḍḍhassa dāyādo, tasmā asappurisena asappurisataroti vuccati. Sappurisoti uttamapuriso.
135 135. ‘比善士更善士者’是指由于自己以身行善而具足善戒,加上由劝令他人所作的善,因而成为其半数之继承者,故为比最上之人更上者。显示巴利原文
135.Sappurisena sappurisataroti attanā katena susīlyena samannāgatattā yañca samādapito karoti. Tato upaḍḍhassa dāyādattā uttamapurisena uttamapurisataro.
136 恶者,即具足十种恶,所谓不善业道。显示巴利原文
136.Pāpoti akusalakammapathasaṅkhātena dasavidhena pāpena samannāgato.
138 善者,即具足十种善法,所谓善业道,清净、贤善。此处其余内容,依前文所述之理,其义自明。显示巴利原文
138.Kalyāṇoti kusalakammapathasaṅkhātena dasavidhena kalyāṇadhammena samannāgato suddhako bhadrako. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānatthameva.
140 在恶法者等之中:‘有恶法者’,即恶法者;‘有善法者’,即善法者。此处其余内容,其义自明。显示巴利原文
140. Pāpadhammādīsu – pāpo dhammo assāti pāpadhammo. Kalyāṇo dhammo assāti kalyāṇadhammo. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
144 144. 于“有罪”等语中:“有罪”即有过失。“以有罪的身业”,即指以有过失的杀生等身业。其余诸句,道理相同。所谓“此人被说为”,是指像这样的人,由三门造作的业带有过失,犹如充满粪便、尸体的地方,因此称为有罪。显示巴利原文
144. Sāvajjādīsu – sāvajjoti sadoso. Sāvajjena kāyakammenāti sadosena pāṇātipātādinā kāyakammena. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo tīhi dvārehi āyūhanakammassa sadosattā, gūthakuṇapādibharito padeso viya sāvajjoti vuccati.
145 145. “有罪为多”:若一个人的有罪身业多,无罪身业少,他便被称为“多有罪身业,少有无罪”。其余语业、意业也是如此。那么,什么样的人是这样呢?即那些随顺村落或城镇的世俗风气,偶尔受持布萨、圆满戒行的人。像这样的人,由于其三门所造之业多有罪过、少有无罪,故被称为“罪多者”。显示巴利原文
145.Sāvajjena bahulanti yassa sāvajjameva kāyakammaṃ bahu hoti, appaṃ anavajjaṃ; so sāvajjena bahulaṃ kāyakammena samannāgato, appaṃ anavajjenāti vuccati. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ko pana evarūpo hotīti? Yo gāmadhammatāya vā nigamadhammatāya vā kadāci karahaci uposathaṃ samādiyati, sīlāni pūreti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo tīhi dvārehi āyūhanakammesu sāvajjasseva bahulatāya anavajjassa appatāya vajjabahuloti vuccati.
正如一处堆放着许多丑陋难闻的花,上面又处处散落着茉莉花、雨花、喇叭花,应知这种人便是第一种。又如一处堆放着许多茉莉花、雨花、喇叭花,上面又处处散落着丑陋难闻的枣花等,这种人便是第三种。第四种人,由于三门所造之业皆无过失,应视为如充满四甜的金钵。其中,第一种是愚钝的凡夫,第二种是偶尔行善的世间凡夫,第三种包括须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含,第四种是漏尽者,他实为绝对无罪者。此为《增支部》注疏。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi ekasmiṃ padese dubbaṇṇāni duggandhāni pupphāni rāsikatānassu, tesaṃ upari tahaṃ tahaṃ atimuttakavassikapāṭalāni patitāni bhaveyyuṃ. Evarūpo ayaṃ puggalo veditabbo. Yathā pana ekasmiṃ padese atimuttakavassikapāṭalāni rāsikatānassu, tesaṃ upari tahaṃ tahaṃ dubbaṇṇaduggandhāni badarapupphādīni patitāni bhaveyyuṃ. Evarūpo tatiyo puggalo veditabbo. Catuttho pana tīhipi dvārehi āyūhanakammassa niddosattā, catumadhurabharitasuvaṇṇapāti viya daṭṭhabbo. Tesu paṭhamo andhabālaputhujjano. Dutiyo antarantarā kusalassa kārako lokiyaputhujjano. Tatiyo sotāpanno sakadāgāmianāgāminopi eteneva saṅgahitā. Catuttho khīṇāsavo. So hi ekantena anavajjoyeva. Ayaṃ aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyo.
148 在“略说即悟者”等语中——“略说即悟者”:此处“略说”指智慧的开启,其义为:仅在智慧被开启的当下便即了知。正如“与举例之时”一语,也指仅在举例的当下即了知。“法现观”是指以智慧对四圣谛法进行现观。此人即是:在以“四念处”等方式简略安立论母之后,能随顺说法而生起智慧、证得阿罗汉果的补特伽罗,即称为略说即悟者。显示巴利原文
148. Ugghaṭitaññūādīsu – ugghaṭitaññūti ettha ugghaṭitaṃ nāma ñāṇugghāṭanaṃ, ñāṇe ugghaṭitamatteyeva jānātīti attho. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāre udāhaṭamatteyeva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’tiādinā nayena saṃkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ugghaṭitaññūti vuccati.
149 “广说即悟者”:了知已经详细分别、广说之义者,称为广说即悟者。此人即是:在简略安立论母之后,当义理被详细分别解说时,能够证得阿罗汉果的补特伽罗,即称为广说即悟者。显示巴利原文
149. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritameva atthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṅkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe bhājiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho puggalo vipañcitaññūti vuccati.
150 “应被引导者”:因须通过教导等方便而被引导,故称为应被引导者。“次第法现观”,即依次第证得阿罗汉果。显示巴利原文
150. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatti.
151 “以文句为最上者”——唯以文句为最上。于彼生中无法现观,意思是无法依此生命体而生起禅那、观、道、果或涅槃。显示巴利原文
151. Byañjanapadameva paramaṃ assāti padaparamo. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti na tena attabhāvena jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ sakkotīti attho.
152 关于“相应辩才者”等——“辩才”既指智慧,也指智慧所现起的言说,此处即取此义。其辩才与义理相应、与理据相应者,即为相应辩才者。被提问后无法即刻迅速作答,故其辩才并非无碍,为非无碍辩才者。依此方法,其余可类推。其中,第一种人:经过一段时间审察后,唯见相应之理,如三藏小那伽长老。据说他受问后,把握问题,只讲述相应与不相应的理据。显示巴利原文
152. Yuttapaṭibhānādīsu – paṭibhānaṃ vuccati ñāṇampi, ñāṇassa upaṭṭhitavacanampi. Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Atthayuttaṃ kāraṇayuttañca paṭibhānamassāti yuttappaṭibhāno. Pucchitānantarameva sīghaṃ byākātuṃ asamatthatāya no muttaṃ paṭibhānamassāti no muttappaṭibhāno. Iminā nayena sesā veditabbā. Ettha pana paṭhamo – kiñci kālaṃ vīmaṃsitvā yuttameva pekkhati, tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero viya. So kira pañhaṃ puṭṭho pariggahetvā yuttapayuttakāraṇameva katheti.
第二种人:被问后即刻以或此或彼的言语回应,即使经过审察,也不见相应之理,如四部众智者帝须长老。据说他受问时,不等问题问完,便随意讲述。然而,若审察其言义,却落不到实处。显示巴利原文
Dutiyo – pucchānantarameva yena vā tena vā vacanena paṭibāhati, vīmaṃsitvāpi ca yuttaṃ na pekkhati catunikāyikapaṇḍitatissatthero viya. So kira pañhaṃ puṭṭho pañhapariyosānampi nāgameti, yaṃ vā taṃ vā kathetiyeva. Vacanatthaṃ panassa vīmaṃsiyamānaṃ katthaci na laggati.
第三种人,在提问的同时即能见到合宜之理,当下便作出解答,如同三藏小无畏长老。据说他一旦被问,便迅速开示,而他的回答既有合理之处,也有不合理之处。显示巴利原文
Tatiyo – pucchāsamakālameva yuttaṃ pekkhati, taṅkhaṇaññeva vacanaṃ byākaroti tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero viya. So kira pañhaṃ puṭṭho sīghameva katheti, yuttapayuttakāraṇo ca hoti.
第四种人,被问时既不见合宜之理,也无法以任何方式应对,就像陷入极暗之中的人,如同拉鲁达伊长老。显示巴利原文
Catuttho – puṭṭho samāno neva yuttaṃ pekkhati , na yena vā tena vā paṭibāhituṃ sakkoti tibbandhakāranimuggo viya hoti lāḷudāyitthero viya.
156 在说法者当中,“说少”是指对在场听众只作简略开示。“不相应”是指说法时,所说不与义理相应,也不与因由相应。“其众不巧”是指坐下听法的听众,不了解何为相应与不相应、何为有理与无理、何为通顺与不通顺。“如此者”即指这一类愚痴说法者,对于如此愚痴的听众,他仅有说法者之名。依此方式,应知一切处之意义。此处,唯有两种人是真实的说法者,其余则是因混入说法者之中,才被如此称说。显示巴利原文
156. Dhammakathikesu – appañca bhāsatīti sampattaparisāya thokameva katheti. Asahitañcāti kathento ca pana na atthayuttaṃ kāraṇayuttaṃ katheti. Parisā cassa na kusalā hotīti sotuṃ nisinnaparisā cassa yuttāyuttaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ siliṭṭhāsiliṭṭhaṃ na jānātīti attho. Evarūpoti ayaṃ evaṃjātiko bāladhammakathiko. Evaṃjātikāya bālaparisāya dhammakathikotveva nāmaṃ labhati. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Ettha ca dveyeva janā sabhāvadhammakathikā, itare pana dhammakathikānaṃ antare paviṭṭhattā evaṃ vuttā.
157 在云的譬喻中,“云”指雨云,“雷”指雷鸣。其中,雷鸣而不降雨的情形是恶劣的。因为人们听到天雷轰鸣,便以为“将降甘霖”,于是取出种子播种。倘若天不降雨,田间的种子便坏在田间,家中的种子便坏在家中,导致饥荒。不雷鸣而降雨的情形也是恶劣的。因为人们以为“此时雨量不足”,只在低洼处播种。然后天降大雨,把所有种子冲入大海,同样导致饥荒。雷鸣且降雨的情形则是好的,那时粮食丰足。不雷鸣也不降雨的情形,则纯是恶劣。显示巴利原文
157. Valāhakūpamesu valāhakāti meghā. Gajjitāti thanitā. Tattha gajjitvā no vassanabhāvo nāma pāpako. Manussā hi yathā devo gajjati ‘suvuṭṭhikā bhavissatī’ti bījāni nīharitvā vapanti. Atha deve avassante khette bījāni khetteyeva nassanti, gehe bījāni geheyeva nassantīti dubbhikkhaṃ hoti. No gajjitvā vassanabhāvopi pāpakova. Manussā hi ‘imasmiṃ kāle dubbuṭṭhikā bhavissatī’ti ninnaṭṭhānesuyeva vappaṃ karonti. Atha devo vassitvā sabbabījāni mahāsamuddaṃ pāpeti, dubbhikkhameva hoti. Gajjitvā vassanabhāvo pana bhaddako. Tadā hi subhikkhaṃ hoti. No gajjitvā no vassanabhāvo ekantapāpakova.
有说而不作者:口中只说“现在我将完成教典之务,完成修习之务”,却不领受教诫,也不修习业处。显示巴利原文
Bhāsitā hoti no kattāti ‘idāni ganthadhuraṃ pūressāmi, vāsadhuraṃ pūressāmī’ti kathetiyeva, na pana uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, na kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāveti.
有作而不说者:并不说“我将完成教典之务或修习之务”,但到了适当时机便成就其事。依此方式,其余几种也可类推。然而,这一切都是就施主而言的。有一种人,邀请僧众说“我将于某日布施”,到时却不作。此人减损福德,比丘僧团也损失利养。另一种人,不邀请僧众,准备了供养后,心想“我将请比丘们来”却未能如愿,因为所有比丘都已被他处邀请。此人同样减损福德,僧团也损失那份利养。另一种人,先邀请僧众,然后准备供养而行布施,此人是尽责者。另一种人,既不邀请僧众,也不布施,当知此是“恶人”。显示巴利原文
Kattā hoti no bhāsitāti ‘ganthadhuraṃ vā pūressāmi vāsadhuraṃ vā’ti na bhāsati. Sampatte pana kāle tamatthaṃ sampādeti. Iminā nayena itarepi veditabbā. Sabbaṃ panetaṃ paccayadāyakeneva kathitaṃ. Eko hi ‘asukadivase nāma dānaṃ dassāmī’ti saṅghaṃ nimanteti, sampattakāle no karoti. Ayaṃ puggalo puññena parihāyati, bhikkhusaṅghopi lābhena parihāyati . Aparo saṅghaṃ animantetvāva sakkāraṃ katvā ‘bhikkhū ānessāmī’ti na labhati, sabbe aññattha nimantitā honti. Ayampi puññena parihāyati , saṅghopi tena lābhena parihāyati. Aparo paṭhamaṃ saṅghaṃ nimantetvā, pacchā sakkāraṃ katvā dānaṃ deti, ayaṃ kiccakārī hoti. Aparo neva saṅghaṃ nimanteti, na dānaṃ deti, ayaṃ ‘pāpapuggalo’ti veditabbo.
158 关于鼠的比喻——‘掘穴而不居’:自己挖掘住处、洞穴,却不住在那里,而住他处,由此落入猫等敌手。也有读作‘掘者’。‘居而不掘穴’:自己不掘,而居他人所掘之洞穴,由此保全生命。第三类两者皆行,得以保全生命。第四类两者皆不,落入敌手。以此譬喻所对应的人中,第一类人:如同鼠掘洞穴,他学习九分教法;但如同鼠不住其穴而住他处、落入敌手,此人虽依教理学习而生起智慧,却不证悟四圣谛法,唯行于世间利养之处,便落入死魔、烦恼魔、天子魔等敌手。第二类人:如同鼠不掘洞穴,他不学习九分教法;却如鼠居他人所掘之穴而保全生命,此人听闻他人说法后,证悟四圣谛法,超越三魔的掌控。依此理趣,第三与第四类人的譬喻对应,也当了知。显示巴利原文
158. Mūsikūpamesu – gādhaṃ kattā no vasitāti attano āsayaṃ bilaṃ kūpaṃ khaṇati, no tattha vasati, kismiñcideva ṭhāne vasati, evaṃ biḷārādiamittavasaṃ gacchati. Khattātipi pāṭho. Vasitā no gādhaṃ kattāti sayaṃ na khaṇati, parena khate bile vasati, evaṃ jīvitaṃ rakkhati. Tatiyā dvepi karontī, jīvitaṃ rakkhati. Catutthā dvepi akarontī amittavasaṃ gacchati. Imāya pana upamāya upamitesu puggalesu paṭhamo yathā sā mūsikā gādhaṃ khaṇati, evaṃ navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ uggaṇhāti. Yathā pana sā tattha na vasati, kismiñcideva ṭhāne vasantī, amittavasaṃ gacchati; tathā ayampi pariyattivasena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā catusaccadhammaṃ na paṭivijjhati, lokāmisaṭṭhānesuyeva caranto maccumārakilesamāradevaputtamārasaṅkhātānaṃ amittānaṃ vasaṃ gacchati. Dutiyo yathā sā mūsikā gādhaṃ na khaṇati, evaṃ navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ na uggaṇhāti. Yathā pana parena khatabile vasantī jīvitaṃ rakkhati; evaṃ parassa kathaṃ sutvā catusaccadhammaṃ paṭivijjhitvā tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ vasaṃ atikkamati. Iminā nayena tatiyacatutthesupi opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
159 关于芒果的比喻——‘生而似熟色’:内里是生的,外表似熟。‘熟而似生色’:内里是熟的,外表似生。其余两种,亦同此理。其中,如同芒果未熟之态为‘生’,人之中,凡夫之态为‘生’,圣者之态为‘熟’。又如同芒果似熟之状为‘似熟色’,人之中,与圣者行履等相似之状,即为‘似熟色’。依此理趣,在所类比的人中,譬喻的对应当知。显示巴利原文
159. Ambūpamesu – āmaṃ pakkavaṇṇīti anto āmaṃ bahi pakkasadisaṃ. Pakkaṃ āmavaṇṇīti anto pakkaṃ bahi āmasadisaṃ. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo. Tattha yathā ambe apakkabhāvo āmatā hoti, evaṃ puggalepi puthujjanabhāvo āmatā, ariyabhāvo pakkatā. Yathā ca tattha pakkasadisatā pakkavaṇṇitā; evaṃ puggalepi ariyānaṃ abhikkamanādisadisatā pakkavaṇṇitāti – iminā nayena upamitapuggalesu opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
160 关于罐的比喻——‘罐’指陶罐。‘空’指内部空无。‘盖’指盖上后放置。‘满’指内部充满。‘开’指敞开而放置。在此所类比的人中,应知:内在无有功德实质、空无所有,只凭外表庄严而为覆藏的人,即是‘盖’者。其余亦同此理。显示巴利原文
160. Kumbhūpamesu – kumbhoti ghaṭo. Tucchoti anto ritto. Pihitoti pidahitvā ṭhapito. Puroti anto puṇṇo. Vivaṭoti vivaritvā ṭhapito. Upamitapuggalesu panettha anto guṇasāravirahito tuccho bāhirasobhanatāya pihito puggalo veditabbo. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
161 水潭的比喻中:首先,水潭——纵使水深仅及膝,由于水具有十五种混色,或因水深厚,而无法见底,这便称为“浅而似深”。然而,纵使水深达三四人高,由于水清澈,得以见底,这便称为“深而似浅”。其余两种,则因兼具两种条件而可知。人也是如此:由于烦恼炽盛且无深厚功德,却具备与功德深厚者相似的行持等,便称为“浅而似深”。依此类推,其余也应了知。显示巴利原文
161. Udakarahadūpamesu – udakarahado tāva jaṇṇumattepi udake sati paṇṇarasasambhinnavaṇṇattā vā bahalattā vā udakassa apaññāyamānatalo uttāno gambhīrobhāso nāma hoti. Tiporisa catuporisepi pana udake sati acchattā udakassa paññāyamānatalo gambhīro uttānobhāso nāma hoti. Ubhayakāraṇasambhāvato pana itare dve veditabbā. Puggalopi kilesussadabhāvato guṇagambhīratāya ca abhāvato guṇagambhīrānaṃ sadisehi abhikkamādīhi yutto uttāno gambhīrobhāso nāma. Iminā nayena sesāpi veditabbā.
162 公牛的比喻中:首先,公牛——那种冲撞、威吓自己牛群,对别家牛群却温顺、习性柔和的,称为“对自家凶暴,不对别家凶暴”。人也是如此:冲撞、侵扰自己眷属,以粗暴语对待,对他人眷属却行温顺、谦恭,便称为“对自家凶暴,不对别家凶暴”。依此类推,其余也应了知。释义句中,“已威吓”即冲撞、侵扰之后,令其达到惊恐状态,这就是其含义。显示巴利原文
162. Balībaddūpamesu – balībaddo tāva yo attano gogaṇaṃ ghaṭṭeti ubbejeti, paragogaṇe pana sorato sukhasīlo hoti – ayaṃ sakagavacaṇḍo no paragavacaṇḍo nāma. Puggalopi attano parisaṃ ghaṭṭento vijjhanto pharusena samudācaranto, paraparisāya pana soraccaṃ nivātavuttitaṃ āpajjanto sakagavacaṇḍo hoti no paragavacaṇḍo nāmāti. Iminā nayena sesāpi veditabbā. Niddesavāre panettha ubbejitā hotīti ghaṭṭetvā vijjhitvā ubbegappattaṃ karoticceva attho.
163 毒蛇的比喻中:首先,毒蛇——那种毒快速发作、迅速扩散,但不剧烈、不长久折磨的,称为“毒速至而非毒剧烈”。其余各项亦依此类推。对人的分类,其义浅显易明。显示巴利原文
163. Āsīvisūpamesu – āsīviso tāva yassa visaṃ āsuṃ āgacchati sīghaṃ pharati; ghoraṃ pana na hoti, cirakālaṃ na pīḷeti – ayaṃ āgataviso no ghoraviso. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Puggalavibhājanaṃ pana uttānatthameva.
164 在“未经审察、未深入而称赞应受毁谤者之功德”等句中,“未经审察”是指未衡量、未把握;“未深入”是指未以智慧深入其功德。显示巴利原文
164.Ananuvicca apariyogāhetvā avaṇṇārahassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitā hotītiādīsu ananuviccāti atulayitvā, apariggaṇhitvā. Apariyogāhetvāti paññāya guṇe anogāhetvā.
166 “真实、如实”:就存在而言为真实,就无颠倒而言为如实。“适时”:指合宜、恰当的时机。其中,“是知时者”即此处所说的“适时”。凡是这样的人:他是知时者,了知时机,对于所问的问题,他知晓“此时纵使被问,也不应说;此时则应说”——这便称为“适时而说”。“住于舍”:安住于中舍而住。其余各处意义浅显。显示巴利原文
166.Bhūtaṃ tacchanti vijjamānato bhūtaṃ, aviparītato tacchaṃ. Kālenāti yuttapayuttakālena. Tatra kālaññū hotīti yamidaṃ kālenāti vuttaṃ. Tatra yo puggalo kālaññū hoti, kālaṃ jānāti, tassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇatthāya ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle pucchitenāpi mayā na kathetabbā, imasmiṃ kāle kathetabbā’’ti – ayaṃ kālena bhaṇati nāma. Upekkhako viharatīti majjhattabhūtāya upekkhāya ṭhito hutvā viharati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthameva.
167 在“以努力之果为生”等句中,这是指那类仅依努力精进度过时日、获得少许等流果以维持生计,却未由此努力获得任何福德果报的人,针对他而说“某人努力”等语。“其上诸天”:指梵身天等以上的天众。这些天众并无凭努力精进所应行之事,唯以福德果报为生。“有福德者”:是说具有福德的刹帝利、婆罗门等,以及从地居天至化乐天为止的诸天。所有这些人天,既享受精进之果,也享受福德之果。地狱众生则既不能以努力产生生计,也没有任何凭借福德果报而产生的生计。显示巴利原文
167. Uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvītiādīsu – yo uṭṭhānavīriyeneva divasaṃ vītināmetvā tassa nissandaphalamattaṃ kiñcideva labhitvā jīvikaṃ kappeti, taṃ pana uṭṭhānaṃ āgamma kiñci puññaphalaṃ na paṭilabhati, taṃ sandhāya yassa puggalassa uṭṭhahatotiādi vuttaṃ. Tatūpari devāti tato upari brahmakāyikādayo devā. Tesañhi uṭṭhānavīriyena kiccaṃ nāma natthi. Puññaphalameva upajīvanti. Puññavato cāti idaṃ puññavante khattiyabrāhmaṇādayo ceva bhummadeve ādiṃ katvā nimmānaratipariyosāne deve ca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sabbepi hete vāyāmaphalañceva puññaphalañca anubhavanti. Nerayikā pana neva uṭṭhānena ājīvaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkonti, nāpi nesaṃ puññaphalena koci ājīvo uppajjati.
168 “生于卑贱之家”等,因与黑暗相应,故称为“黑暗者”。又因由身恶行等而堕入地狱之黑暗,故称为“以黑暗为归宿者”。“尼沙陀族”指捕鹿人等族。“韦那族”指竹工族。“车匠族”指皮匠族。“普库萨族”指弃花族。“生活困苦”指生活痛苦。“丑陋”指如尘垢饿鬼般,肤色犹如烧焦的木桩。“难看”指连生母见了也不悦目。“矮小”指侏儒。“独眼”指一眼盲或双眼盲。“手曲”指一手曲或双手曲。“跛足”指一足跛或双足跛。“断翼”指断翼者、如蛇般匍匐而行者。“灯器”指油碟等灯具。如是,有一类人为黑暗者、以黑暗为归宿者,于外不见光明,即在母胎中死去而生于恶趣,于整个劫中轮转。此亦为黑暗者、以黑暗为归宿者。然而,彼可能是诡诈之人,因为据说诡诈者会有这样的投生。显示巴利原文
168. Tamādīsu – ‘‘nīce kule paccājāto’’tiādikena tamena yuttoti tamo. Kāyaduccaritādīhi puna nirayatamūpagamanato tamaparāyaṇo. Nesādakuleti migaluddakādīnaṃ kule. Venakuleti vilīvakārakule. Rathakārakuleti cammakārakule. Pukkusakuleti pupphachaḍḍakakule. Kasiravuttiketi dukkhavuttike. Dubbaṇṇoti paṃsupisācako viya jhāmakhāṇuvaṇṇo. Duddasikoti vijātamātuyāpi amanāpadassano. Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako. Kāṇoti ekakkhikāṇo vā ubhayakkhikāṇo vā. Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā. Khañjoti ekapādakhañjo vā ubhayapādakhañjo vā. Pakkhahatoti hatapakkho pīṭhasappī. Padīpeyyassāti telakapallakādino padīpūpakaraṇassa. Evaṃ puggalo tamo hoti tamaparāyaṇoti ettha eko puggalo bahiddhā ālokaṃ adisvā mātukucchismiññeva kālaṃ katvā apāyesu nibbattanto sakalepi kappe saṃsarati. Sopi tamo tamaparāyaṇova. So pana kuhakapuggalo bhaveyya. Kuhakassa hi evarūpā nibbatti hotīti vuttaṃ.
在此,“生于卑贱之家,或生于旃陀罗家等”表示出身的缺失与已生起资具的缺失。“贫穷等”表示现前资具的缺失。“生活困苦等”表示谋生方式的缺失。“丑陋等”表示容貌的缺失。“多病等”表示与苦因的结合。“不得等”表示乐因的缺失与受用的缺失。“身恶行等”表示成为“以黑暗为归宿者”之因的结合。“身坏命终等”表示趣向来世的黑暗。白分则应依所说黑分的相反道理而了知。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca nīce kule paccājāto hoti caṇḍālakule vātiādīhi āgamanavipatti ceva pubbuppannapaccayavipatti ca dassitā. Daliddetiādīhi pavattipaccayavipatti. Kasiravuttiketiādīhi ājīvupāyavipatti. Dubbaṇṇotiādīhi rūpavipatti. Bahvābādhotiādīhi dukkhakāraṇasamāyogo. Na lābhītiādīhi sukhakāraṇavipatti ceva upabhogavipatti ca. Kāyena duccaritantiādīhi tamaparāyaṇabhāvassa kāraṇasamāyogo. Kāyassa bhedātiādīhi samparāyikatamūpagamo. Sukkapakkho vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.
又,在此,由三种族姓成就,即“生于”等,因与光明相应,故称为“光明者”,意为成为光明。又因由身善行等而往生天界之光明状态,故称为“以光明为归宿者”。“生于刹帝利大富家等”中,“刹帝利大富”指刹帝利中之大财富者、已得大财富的刹帝利。凡刹帝利,其埋藏之财最少有一亿,并有三罐金币堆于家中供日常使用,即名为刹帝利大富。凡婆罗门,其埋藏之财有八亿,并有一罐半金币堆于家中供日常使用,即名为婆罗门大富。凡居士,其埋藏之财有四亿,并有一罐金币堆于家中供日常使用,即名为居士大富。这是生于他们之家的意思。“富裕”指自在。“大财”因埋藏之财巨大。“大受用”因金器、银器等受用物品众多。“多金银”因埋藏之金银众多。“多资具”因能令满足的资具众多。“多财谷”因牛群等及七种谷物众多。“端正”指容貌美好。“可观”指值得放下其他事务而终日观看。“令人欢喜”指仅凭观看即能令心生欢喜。“最上”指最殊胜。“肤色润泽”指肤色润泽。“润泽”指身体,即其肤色具足之意。“具足”指具备。显示巴利原文
Apicettha tividhāya kulasampattiyā paccājātiādikena jotinā yuttato joti, ālokabhūtoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyasucaritādīhi pana saggūpapattijotibhāvūpagamanato jotiparāyaṇo. Khattiyamahāsālakule vātiādīsu khattiyamahāsālāti khattiyā mahāsārā mahāsārappattā khattiyā. Yesañhi khattiyānaṃ heṭṭhimantena koṭisataṃ nidhānagataṃ hoti, tayo kahāpaṇakumbhā vaḷañjanatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapitā honti, te khattiyamahāsālā nāma. Yesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ asītikoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, diyaḍḍho kahāpaṇakumbho vaḷañjanatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, te brāhmaṇamahāsālā nāma. Yesaṃ gahapatīnaṃ cattālīsakoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, kahāpaṇakumbho vaḷañjatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, te gahapatimahāsālā nāma. Tesaṃ kuleti attho. Aḍḍheti issare. Nidhānagatadhanassa mahantatāya mahaddhane. Suvaṇṇarajatabhājanādīnaṃ upabhogabhaṇḍānaṃ mahantatāya mahābhoge. Nidhānagatassa jātarūparajatassa pahūtatāya pahūtajātarūparajate. Vittūpakaraṇassa tuṭṭhikaraṇassa pahūtatāya pahūtavittūpakaraṇe. Godhanādīnañca sattavidhadhaññānañca pahūtatāya pahūtadhanadhaññe. Abhirūpoti sundararūpo. Dassanīyoti aññaṃ kammaṃ pahāya divasampi passitabbayutto. Pāsādikoti dassaneneva cittapasādāvaho. Paramāyāti uttamāya. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti pokkharavaṇṇatāya. Pokkharaṃ vuccati sarīraṃ. Tassa vaṇṇasampattiyāti attho. Samannāgatoti upeto.
169 关于“低者、低者”等——缺乏现世或来世成就者,为“低者”,意为卑下、低劣。其相反者为“高者”,意为崇高、上升。其余应依“黑暗者”等中所说之理而了知。又,“低者低者”指现世为低者,来世亦为低者;“低者高者”指现世为低者,来世为高者;“高者低者”指现世为高者,来世为低者;“高者高者”指现世为高者,来世亦为高者。显示巴利原文
169. Oṇatoṇatādīsu – diṭṭhadhammikāya vā samparāyikāya vā sampattiyā virahito oṇato. Nīco, lāmakoti attho. Tabbipakkhato uṇṇato. Ucco, uggatoti attho. Sesamettha tamādīsu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Apica – oṇatoṇatoti idāni nīco, āyatimpi nīcova bhavissati. Oṇatuṇṇatoti idāni nīco, āyatiṃ ucco bhavissati. Uṇṇatoṇatoti idāni ucco, āyatiṃ nīco bhavissati. Uṇṇatuṇṇatoti idāni ucco, āyatimpi uccova bhavissatīti.
170 关于“树喻”——首先,“肤材所围绕之树”指:林中最老之树自身为肤材,而其周围之树则为心材。其余可依此理了知。于人之中,因缺乏戒之核心而有肤材性,因具足戒行而有心材性,应如是了知。显示巴利原文
170. Rukkhūpamesu – rukkho tāva pheggusāraparivāroti vanajeṭṭhakarukkho sayaṃ pheggu hoti , parivārarukkhā panassa sārā honti. Iminā nayena sesā veditabbā. Puggalesu pana sīlasāravirahato pheggutā, sīlācārasamannāgamena ca sāratā veditabbā.
171 关于“以貌取人者”等——以具足成就之容貌作为衡量标准者,为“以貌取人者”。对此生起净信者,为“于貌生净信者”。以名为名声之语作为衡量标准者,为“以声取人者”。关于“身高”等:“身高”指高度;“围量”指远离了过瘦过胖的周圆成就;“形体”指肢体各节在长短、圆等与所处位置相应的状态;“圆满”指如前所述种类之无缺,或相好具足。“他称赞”指他人于背后所说的功德称赞;“他赞叹”指他人以赞颂方式,以偈颂等总结所说的赞叹;“他褒扬”指他人于面前所说的褒扬;“他传誉”指他人辗转赞颂所起的传誉。显示巴利原文
171. Rūpappamāṇādīsu – sampattiyuttaṃ rūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ karotīti rūpappamāṇo. Tattha pasādaṃ janetīti rūpappasanno. Kittisaddabhūtaṃ ghosaṃ pamāṇaṃ karotīti ghosappamāṇo. Ārohaṃ vātiādīsu pana – ārohanti uccattanaṃ. Pariṇāhanti kisathūlabhāvāpagataṃ parikkhepasampattiṃ. Saṇṭhānanti aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ dīgharassavaṭṭatādiyuttaṭṭhānesu tathābhāvaṃ. Pāripūrinti yathāvuttappakārānaṃ anūnataṃ, lakkhaṇaparipuṇṇabhāvaṃ vā. Paravaṇṇanāyāti parehi parammukhā nicchāritāya guṇavaṇṇanāya. Parathomanāyāti parehi thutivasena gāthādiupanibandhanena vuttāya thomanāya. Parapasaṃsanāyāti parehi sammukhā vuttāya pasaṃsāya. Paravaṇṇahārikāyāti paramparathutivasena parehi pavattitāya vaṇṇaharaṇāya.
172 “衣粗劣”:指衣服由于色泽不好等而显得粗劣。“钵粗劣”:指食器由于颜色、形状、材质而显得粗劣。“住所粗劣”:指住所由于缺乏戏剧等成就而显得粗劣。“种种”:指以裸体等状态而呈现的多种多样。“难行苦行”:指折磨身体。显示巴利原文
172.Cīvaralūkhanti cīvarassa dubbaṇṇādibhāvena lūkhataṃ. Pattalūkhanti bhājanassa vaṇṇasaṇṭhānavatthūhi lūkhataṃ. Senāsanalūkhanti nāṭakādisampattivirahena senāsanassa lūkhataṃ. Vividhanti acelakādibhāvena anekappakāraṃ. Dukkarakārikanti sarīratāpanaṃ.
另一种解释:在这四种人中,以容貌作为标准而生起净信者,名为以容貌为量。“对容貌有净信”正是其同义词。以音声作为标准而生起净信者,名为以音声为量。以衣着粗劣、钵食粗劣作为标准而生起净信者,名为以粗劣为量。以法作为标准而生起净信者,名为以法为量。其余词语正是它们的同义词。若将一切有情分为三份,其中两份是以容貌为量者,一份不是以容貌为量者。若分为五份,其中四份是以音声为量者,一份不是以音声为量者。若分为十份,其中九份是以粗劣为量者,一份不是以粗劣为量者。然而若分为十万份,则仅有一份是以法为量者,其余的都不是以法为量者。如此,便是这四种量者的世间聚集。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – imesu hi catūsu puggalesu rūpe pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno rūpappamāṇo nāma. Rūpappasannoti tasseva atthavacanaṃ. Ghose pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno ghosappamāṇo nāma. Cīvaralūkhapattalūkhesu pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno lūkhappamāṇo nāma. Dhamme pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno dhammappamāṇo nāma. Itarāni tesaṃyeva atthavacanāni. Sabbasatte ca tayo koṭṭhāse katvā dve koṭṭhāsā rūpappamāṇā, eko na rūpappamāṇo. Pañca koṭṭhāse katvā cattāro koṭṭhāsā ghosappamāṇā, eko na ghosappamāṇo. Dasa koṭṭhāse katvā nava koṭṭhāsā lūkhappamāṇā, eko na lūkhappamāṇo. Satasahassaṃ koṭṭhāse katvā pana eko koṭṭhāsova dhammappamāṇo, sesā na dhammappamāṇā. Evamayaṃ catuppamāṇo lokasannivāso.
在这四种量的世间聚集之中,对诸佛不生净信的人少,生净信的人多。因为对于以容貌为量者而言,没有比佛陀的容貌更能带来净信的容貌了。对于以音声为量者而言,没有比诸佛的称誉之声更能带来净信的音声了。对于以粗劣为量者而言,没有比世尊的粗劣更能带来净信的其他粗劣了——他舍弃了迦尸国的衣服、价值连城的金钵、适合三季并具足一切庄严的殊胜殿堂,而受用粪扫衣、石钵、树下等坐卧处。对于以法为量者而言,在包括天界在内的世间,没有比如来那不与世间共的戒等功德更能带来净信的其他戒等功德了。如此,世尊犹如将这四种量的世间聚集握在手中一般,安住其中。显示巴利原文
Etasmiṃ catuppamāṇe lokasannivāse buddhesu appasannā mandā, pasannāva bahukā. Rūpappamāṇassa hi buddharūpato uttari pasādāvahaṃ rūpaṃ nāma natthi. Ghosappamāṇassa buddhānaṃ kittighosato uttari pasādāvaho ghoso nāma natthi. Lūkhappamāṇassa kāsikāni vatthāni mahārahāni kañcanabhājanāni tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ anucchavike sabbasampattiyutte pāsādavare pahāya paṃsukūlacīvaraselamayapattarukkhamūlādisenāsanasevino buddhassa bhagavato lūkhato uttari pasādāvahaṃ aññaṃ lūkhaṃ nāma natthi. Dhammappamāṇassa sadevake loke asādhāraṇasīlādiguṇassa tathāgatassa sīlādiguṇato uttari pasādāvaho añño sīlādiguṇo nāma natthi. Iti bhagavā imaṃ catuppamāṇikaṃ lokasannivāsaṃ muṭṭhinā gahetvā viya ṭhitoti.
173 173. 在“为自利而行”等中——“具戒者”意为以戒具足、成就。“具定者”等也是同样的方法。这里所说的戒,包含世间戒与出世间戒;定与慧也同样如此。解脱唯指阿拉汉果的解脱。智见是十九种省察智。在“不令他人”等中——对他人说完“你也应当成为具戒者”之后,并不像自己持戒那样令他人受持、执取。此方法可适用于一切处。在这四种人中,应知第一种人类似于跋迦利长老,第二种人类似于乌巴难达释迦子,第三种人类似于舍利弗、目犍连长老,第四种人类似于提婆达多。显示巴利原文
173. Attahitāya paṭipannādīsu – sīlasampannoti sīlena sampanno samannāgato. Samādhisampannotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca sīlaṃ lokiyalokuttaraṃ kathitaṃ. Tathā samādhipaññā ca. Vimutti arahattaphalavimuttiyeva. Ñāṇadassanaṃ ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. No parantiādīsu – parapuggalaṃ ‘‘tayāpi sīlasampannena bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vatvā yathā sīlaṃ samādiyati, evaṃ na samādapeti, na gaṇhāpeti. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Etesu pana catūsu paṭhamo vakkalittherasadiso hoti. Dutiyo upanandasakyaputtasadiso . Tatiyo sāriputtamoggallānattherasadiso. Catuttho devadattasadisoti veditabbo.
174 174. 在“自苦”等中——“自苦者”意为使自己炽热、受苦。“自苦遍行”即从事自我折磨的修行。“裸行者”即无衣者、裸体者。“放任行为者”即行为放纵者。在大便等事上,他完全脱离了世间良家子弟的行为方式,站着大便、小便,站着咀嚼、进食。“舔手者”指当手中的食物吃完后,用舌头舔手;又有一种解释,是指在大便后,将手视为棍杖,用手擦拭。据说他们将棍杖视为有情,因此为了圆满他们的修行方式而这样做。为了取食而说“来,尊者”,他却不过来,故为“不来尊者者”。同样地,说“停,尊者”,他并不停住,故为“不停尊者者”。这两者,外道们都不做,认为“这样做了就成为听从他的话”。“已持来者”指事先取来而持来的食物。“特别指定者”指被告知“这是专门为你们做的”这样的食物。“不邀请者”指即使有人邀请说“请进入某家、某街、某村”,对于这样的食物他也不会接受、不会取用。显示巴利原文
174. Attantapādīsu – attānaṃ tapati dukkhāpetīti attantapo. Attano paritāpanānuyogaṃ attaparitāpanānuyogaṃ. Acelakoti niccelo, naggo. Muttācāroti visaṭṭhācāro. Uccārakammādīsu lokiyakulaputtācārena virahito ṭhitakova uccāraṃ karoti, passāvaṃ karoti, khādati, bhuñjati ca. Hatthāpalekhanoti hatthe piṇḍamhi niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaṃ apalekhati. Uccāraṃ vā katvā hatthasmiññeva daṇḍakasaññī hutvā hatthena apalekhatīti dasseti. Te kira daṇḍakaṃ sattoti paññapenti. Tasmā tesaṃ paṭipadaṃ pūrento evaṃ karoti. Bhikkhāgahaṇatthaṃ ‘ehi bhaddante’ti vutto, na etīti naehibhaddantiko. Tena hi ‘tiṭṭha bhaddante’ti vuttopi na tiṭṭhatīti natiṭṭhabhaddantiko. Tadubhayampi hetaṃ titthiyā ‘‘etassa vacanaṃ kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti na karonti. Abhihaṭanti puretaraṃ gahetvā āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ. Uddissakatanti ‘‘imaṃ tumhe uddissa kata’’nti evaṃ ārocitabhikkhaṃ. Na nimantananti ‘‘asukaṃ nāma kulaṃ vā vīthiṃ vā gāmaṃ vā paviseyyāthā’’ti evaṃ nimantitabhikkhampi na sādiyati, na gaṇhāti.
“不从罐口”:即不从罐中取出而给予的食物,他不接受。“不从篮口”:“篮”指锅或筐,也不从那里接受。为什么?因为罐、篮会被勺子击打。“不在门槛内”:指不隔着门槛而给予的食物,他不接受。为什么?“此人依我而获得隔碍。”对于杵臼也是同样的方法。“二人”:即两人正在进食时,一人站起来施与,他不接受。为什么?因为会有食物中断。在“不从孕妇”等中,孕妇腹中的孩子会受苦,哺乳妇女会令孩子乳汁中断,与男子共处的妇女会有欢爱中断,因此他不接受。“不在集食处”:即对于集众而做的食物。据说在饥荒时,裸行者的弟子们为了裸行者而从各处募集米等来煮饭,上等裸行者不从那里接受。“不在有狗处”:狗在那里期待着“我要得到食物团”,不施与狗而持来的食物,他不接受。为什么?因为这狗会有食物中断。显示巴利原文
Nakumbhimukhāti kumbhito uddharitvā diyyamānaṃ bhikkhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Na kaḷopimukhāti kaḷopīti ukkhali, pacchi vā. Tatopi na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Kumbhī kaḷopiyo kaṭacchunā pahāraṃ labhantīti. Na eḷakamantaranti ummāraṃ antaraṃ katvā diyyamānaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Ayaṃ maṃ nissāya antarakaraṇaṃ labhatīti. Daṇḍamusalesupi eseva nayo. Dvinnanti dvīsu bhuñjamānesu ekasmiṃ uṭṭhāya dente na gaṇhati. Kasmā? Kabaḷantarāyo hotīti. Na gabbhiniyātiādīsu pana gabbhiniyā kucchiyaṃ dārako kilamati. Pāyantiyā dārakassa khīrantarāyo hoti. Purisantaragatāya ratiantarāyo hotīti na gaṇhāti na saṅkittīsūti saṅkittetvā katabhattesu. Dubbhikkhasamaye kira acelakasāvakā acelakānaṃ atthāya tato tato taṇḍulādīni samādapetvā bhattaṃ pacanti, ukkaṭṭhācelako tato na paṭiggaṇhāti. Na yattha sāti yattha sunakho ‘piṇḍaṃ labhissāmī’ti upaṭṭhito hoti, tattha tassa adatvā āhaṭaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Etassa piṇḍantarāyo hotīti.
“群飞而行者”指成群结队飞行。若有人看见裸行者,心想“我们要布施此人”便进入施食堂;当他们进入时,原本停在篮口等处的苍蝇纷纷飞起,成群飞行。由此因缘,他不接受从那里持来的食物。为什么呢?因为“由于我,苍蝇失去了觅食之处”。“谷皮水”即用一切谷物制成的酸粥。在此,唯有饮酒有罪,而此人也视此为有罪。“一家者”指仅在一家得食即返回者。“一口食者”指仅以一口食维生者。“二家者”等同理。“一次施与”即一次给予。所谓“施与”,是一个小钵,人们将最初的食物放入其中而放置。显示巴利原文
Saṇḍasaṇḍacārinīti samūhasamūhacārinī. Sace hi acelakaṃ disvā ‘imassa bhikkhaṃ dassāmā’ti mānussakā bhattagehaṃ pavisanti, tesu ca pavisantesu kaḷopimukhādīsu nilīnā makkhikā uppatitvā saṇḍasaṇḍā caranti, tato āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Maṃ nissāya makkhikānaṃ gocarantarāyo jātoti. Thusodakanti sabbasassasambhārehi kataṃ sovīrakaṃ. Ettha ca surāpānameva sāvajjaṃ. Ayaṃ pana etasmimpi sāvajjasaññī. Ekāgārikoti yo ekasmiṃyeva gehe bhikkhaṃ labhitvā nivattati. Ekālopikoti yo ekeneva ālopena yāpeti. Dvāgārikādīsupi eseva nayo. Ekissāpi dattiyāti ekāya dattiyā. Datti nāma ekā khuddakapāti hoti, yattha aggabhikkhaṃ pakkhipitvā ṭhapenti.
“一日间隔”指隔一日。“半月间隔”指隔半月。“轮番食”指按日轮替的饮食,即依一日、二日、七日、半月等日数轮替而受用的食物。“食菜者”指食生菜者。“食稗子者”指食稗子米者。在野稻等中——所谓野稻,首先指森林中自然生长的稻类。“残皮”指皮革匠刮削皮革后所弃的碎屑。“苔”指石苔、水苔以及迦尼迦罗等树的树脂。“糠”指米糠。“粥”指粘在锅上的焦饭,从丢弃处取食,也称为“饭浆”。饼粕等显而易见。“食落果者”指食掉落果实者。显示巴利原文
Ekāhikanti ekadivasantarikaṃ. Aḍḍhamāsikanti aḍḍhamāsantarikaṃ. Pariyāyabhattabhojananti vārabhattabhojanaṃ. Ekāhavārena dvīhavārena sattāhavārena aḍḍhamāsavārenāti – evaṃ divasavārena ābhatabhattabhojanaṃ. Sākabhakkhoti allasākabhakkho. Sāmākabhakkhoti sāmākataṇḍulabhakkho. Nīvārādīsu – nīvārā nāma tāva araññe sayaṃ jātā vīhijāti. Daddulanti cammakārehi cammaṃ vilikhitvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ. Haṭaṃ vuccati silesopi, sevālopi kaṇikārādirukkhaniyyāsopi. Kaṇanti kuṇḍakaṃ. Ācāmoti bhattaukkhalikāya laggo jhāmodano. Taṃ chaḍḍitaṭṭhāne gahetvā khādati. ‘‘Odanakañjiya’’ntipi vadanti. Piññākādayo pākaṭā eva. Pavattaphalabhojīti patitaphalabhojī.
“麻衣”指以麻纤维织成的布。“杂衣”指混纺布。“尸衣”指从死尸身上丢弃的衣服,或以芦苇草等编结而成的下衣。“粪扫衣”指被弃于地上的破布。“树皮衣”指以树皮制成的衣服。“兽皮”指羚羊等野兽的皮。“裂兽皮”指将兽皮从中间剖开,也称“带蹄皮”。“吉祥草衣”指以吉祥草编结而成的衣。树皮衣、树皮片衣同理。“发毯”指以人发织成的毯,关于此,经中说:“诸比丘,譬如一切纺织之衣中,发毯被认为最劣。”(增支部3.138)“兽毛毯”指以马鬃等兽毛织成的毯。“枭羽衣”指以枭鸟羽毛编结而成的下衣。“竖立者”指向上竖立者。显示巴利原文
Sāṇānīti sāṇavākacelāni. Masāṇānīti missakacelāni. Chavadussānīti matasarīrato chaḍḍitavatthāni. Erakatiṇādīni vā ganthetvā katanivāsanāni. Paṃsukūlānīti pathaviyaṃ chaḍḍitanantakāni. Tirīṭānīti rukkhattacavatthāni. Ajinanti ajinamigacammaṃ. Ajinakkhipanti tadeva majjhe phālitaṃ. Sakhurakantipi vadanti. Kusacīranti kusatiṇāni ganthetvā katacīrakaṃ. Vākacīraphalakacīresupi eseva nayo. Kesakambalanti manussakesehi katakambalaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yāni kānici tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ kesakambalo tesaṃ patikuṭṭho akkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.138). Vāḷakambalanti assavāḷādīhi katakambalaṃ. Ulūkapakkhanti ulūkapattāni ganthetvā katanivāsanaṃ. Ubbhaṭṭhakoti uddhaṃ ṭhitako.
“从事蹲踞精勤者”:指致力于蹲踞苦行之人。即使行走,他也保持蹲踞的姿势,以跳跃的方式前进。“荆棘卧者”:即将铁荆棘或天然荆棘钉在地上,铺上皮革,于其上作行、住、坐、卧等事。“卧处”:即便躺卧,亦唯于此处安卧。“傍晚第三次”:指傍晚时分第三次入水。亦即“早晨、中午、傍晚,一日三次我将涤除罪恶”,他如是致力于入水沐浴而安住。显示巴利原文
Ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyuttoti ukkuṭikavīriyaṃ anuyutto. Gacchantopi ukkuṭikova hutvā uppatitvā uppatitvā gacchati. Kaṇṭakāpassayikoti ayakaṇṭake vā pakatikaṇṭake vā bhūmiyaṃ koṭṭetvā tattha cammaṃ attharitvā ṭhānacaṅkamādīni karoti. Seyyanti sayantopi tattheva seyyaṃ kappeti. Sāyaṃ tatiyamassāti sāyatatiyakaṃ. ‘‘Pāto, majjhanhike, sāyanti divasassa tikkhattuṃ pāpaṃ pavāhessāmī’’ti udakorohanānuyogaṃ anuyutto viharati.
175 一七五、“折磨他人者”:即令他人受苦之人。他致力于折磨他人、使其苦恼。所谓“屠羊者等”之中——“羊”指山羊;杀羊者名为“屠羊者”。“屠猪者等”亦同此理。“猎人”:指残忍、粗暴之人。“杀鱼者”:捕鱼人、渔夫。“狱卒”:看守监狱者。“残酷业者”:从事残忍行业之人。显示巴利原文
175. Paraṃ tapatīti parantapo. Paresaṃ paritāpanānuyogaṃ paraparitāpanānuyogaṃ. Orabbhikādīsu – urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā. Urabbhe hanatīti orabbhiko. Sūkarikādīsupi – eseva nayo. Luddoti dāruṇo kakkhaḷo. Macchaghātakoti macchabandho kevaṭṭo. Bandhanāgārikoti bandhanāgāragopako. Kurūrakammantāti dāruṇakammantā.
176 一七六、“灌顶者”:即通过刹帝利灌顶仪式而被灌顶于头顶者。“在城东”:指城市往东的方向。“集会堂”:祭祀大厅。“穿着粗兽皮”:即穿着带蹄的羚羊皮。“以酥油”:指用酥与油。因为除酥之外,其余一切油脂皆称为油。“搔痒时”:由于指甲被剪,在需要搔痒时便用此兽皮搔痒。“无间隔地”:即没有铺设。“同色牛犊”:指与其相应的牛犊。若母牛为白色,牛犊亦为白色;若为杂色或红色,牛犊亦如是——是名同色牛犊。“他这样说”:那位国王如此说道。“壮牛犊”:指已超过幼犊阶段、强壮的牛犊。“壮母牛犊”:同理。“为敷草”:即为作围栏及铺设祭祀场地而成的草。显示巴利原文
176.Muddhāvasittoti khattiyābhisekena muddhani abhisitto. Puratthimena nagarassāti nagarato puratthimadisāya. Sandhāgāranti yaññasālaṃ . Kharājinaṃ nivāsetvāti sakhuraṃ ajinacammaṃ nivāsetvā. Sappitelenāti sappinā ca telena ca. Ṭhapetvā hi sappiṃ avaseso yo koci sneho telanti vuccati. Kaṇḍuvamānoti nakhānaṃ chinnattā kaṇḍuvitabbakāle tena kaṇḍuvamāno. Anantarahitāyāti asanthatāya. Sarūpavacchāyāti sadisavacchāya. Sace gāvī setā hoti, vacchopi setakova sace kabarā vā, rattā vā, vacchopi tādisovāti – evaṃ sarūpavacchāya. So evamāhāti so rājā evaṃ vadeti. Vacchatarāti taruṇavacchakabhāvaṃ atikkantā balavavacchā. Vacchatarīsupi eseva nayo. Barihisatthāyāti parikkhepakaraṇatthāya ceva yaññabhūmiyaṃ attharaṇatthāya ca.
177 “于现法”即在此生此身之中。“无渴者”——渴爱称为“渴”,他没有渴爱,故为无渴者。因一切烦恼已寂灭,故为寂灭者。因内心无热恼烦恼,成为清凉,故为清凉者。他体验禅那、道、果、涅槃之乐,故为体验乐者。“以自己成为梵天”即以自己成为最胜者。显示巴利原文
177.Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Nicchātoti chātaṃ vuccati taṇhā, sā assa natthīti nicchāto. Sabbakilesānaṃ nibbutattā nibbuto. Anto tāpanakilesānaṃ abhāvā sītalo jātoti sītībhūto. Jhānamaggaphalanibbānasukhāni paṭisaṃvedetīti sukhappaṭisaṃvedī. Brahmabhūtena attanāti seṭṭhabhūtena attanā.
为了从佛陀出世开始显示此人,而说“此处如来”等。其中,“如来”以八种理由称世尊为如来——如是以来故为如来,如是以去故为如来,如是以实相而来故为如来,如是以如实觉悟真实法故为如来,如是以如实见故为如来,如是以如实说故为如来,如是以如实行故为如来,以超胜之义故为如来。“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等词在《清净道论》中已详细解释。“彼法”指具备上述特质的法。“居士或其他人听闻”——为何首先提到居士?因为其慢心已除,且人数众多。通常,从刹帝利家族出家者依出身而起慢,从婆罗门家族出家者依咒术而起慢,低种姓家族出家者因自己出身低微而不能立足。然而,居士之子们曾以腋下流汗、背上结盐花的方式耕种土地,由于没有那样的慢心,故慢心与骄慢已除。他们出家后,不生慢心或骄慢,尽力学习佛语,修习毗婆舍那,能证得阿拉汉果。而从其他家族出家者并不多,居士出家者则很多。因此,由于慢心已除且人数众多,故首先提到居士。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pana puggalaṃ buddhuppādato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ – idha tathāgatotiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatoti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathāvāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti. Arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotiādīni visuddhimagge vitthāritāneva. Taṃ dhammanti taṃ vuttappakārasampadaṃ dhammaṃ. Suṇāti gahapati vāti kasmā paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisati? Nihatamānattā ussannattā ca. Yebhuyyena hi khattiyakulato pabbajitā jātiṃ nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇakulā pabbajitā mante nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Hīnajaccakulā pabbajitā attano vijātitāya patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gahapatidārakā pana kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya bhūmiṃ kasitvā tādisassa mānassa abhāvato nihatamānadappā honti. Te pabbajitvā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akatvā yathābalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ karontā sakkonti arahatte patiṭṭhātuṃ. Itarehi ca kulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitā nāma na bahukā, gahapatikāva bahukā. Iti nihatamānattā ussannattā ca paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti.
“于某一家族中”是指其余家族中的某一个。“再生”是指出生。“于如来处获得信心”是指听闻了清净的法之后,对法主如来生起信心:“彼世尊确实是正自觉者”。“如此思惟”是指这样观察。“居家是拥挤的”,即使夫妇二人住在六十肘宽的房屋或相隔一百由旬之处,由于有执着与障碍的缘故,居家仍然是拥挤的。“尘垢之路”,据大注疏说,是贪欲之尘等生起之处。也可以称为“来路”。“如同虚空”是因为无执着的缘故而像虚空。因为出家人即使住在尖顶楼阁、宝石宫殿、天宫等门窗紧闭的隐蔽之处,也根本不会执着、不会黏着、不会系缚。因此说:“出家是虚空”。显示巴利原文
Aññatarasmiṃ vāti itaresaṃ vā kulānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ. Paccājātoti patijāto. Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā dhammassāmimhi tathāgate ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati. Sambādho gharāvāsoti sacepi saṭṭhihatthe ghare yojanasatantarepi vā dve jāyampatikā vasanti, tathāpi nesaṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhoyeva. Rajopathoti rāgarajādīnaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āgamanapathotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Alagganaṭṭhena abbhokāso viyāti abbhokāso. Pabbajito hi kūṭāgāraratanapāsāde ca devavimānādīsu ca supihitadvāravātapānesu paṭicchannesu vasantopi neva laggati, na sajjati, na bajjhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’ti.
再者,居家生活是逼迫的,因为缺乏行善的空间。尘垢之道,如同不加遮盖的垃圾场,是烦恼尘垢的积聚之处。出家则是开阔的,因为能随愿获得行善的空间。在此,‘这不容易……出家’的简略意思是:这三学梵行,必须一日也不间断地修习,乃至临终一念,故为绝对圆满;必须一日也不被烦恼垢染,乃至临终一念,故为绝对清净。应如磨光的贝壳、如洗净的贝壳般行持。这对于住在家中、居于家中的人来说,不容易做到绝对圆满……行持——‘我何不剃除须发,穿上染成黄褐色、适合行梵行者之衣,从家出离,出家而为无家者’。在此,因为在家所适宜的耕田、经商等业称为‘家业’,而出家中没有这些,故应知出家为‘无家’。即那无家。‘出家’是指实行。‘少’是指财富积聚在千数以下为少,千数以上为大。以无系缚义言,‘亲属’即是亲属圈。那也是在二十人以下为少,二十人以上为大。显示巴利原文
Apica – sambādho gharāvāso kusalakiriyāya okāsābhāvato. Rajopatho asaṃvutasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ viya rajānaṃ kilesarajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato. Abbhokāso pabbajjā kusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsasambhāvato. Nayidaṃ sukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyyanti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepakathā – yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ. Ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalinaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ. Saṅkhalikhitaṃ likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ – ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyya’’nti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ ‘‘agāriya’’nti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā ‘‘anagāriya’’nti ñātabbā. Taṃ anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paṭipajjeyyaṃ. Appaṃ vāti sahassato heṭṭhā bhogakkhandho appo nāma hoti, sahassato paṭṭhāya mahā. Abandhanaṭṭhena ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo. Sopi vīsatiyā heṭṭhā appo hoti, vīsatiyā paṭṭhāya mahā.
178 具足比丘之学和共住:即比丘们以增上戒为学的学处,以及他们共同生活、同一生计、和合共住之处,亦即世尊所制学处所摄的共住。于此,以修学之义而具足,故称为‘具足比丘之学与共住’。‘具足’是指圆满学处、不违越共住,即成就此二者之意。‘断除杀生’等中,杀生等如后文所述。‘断除’是指断除名为杀生思的不善行。‘防护’是指从断除之时起,即从那不善行远离而住。‘放下棍棒、放下刀杖’是指为了伤害他人而不执持棍棒或刀杖,故为放下棍棒、放下刀杖。在此,除棍棒外,其余一切能毁坏众生的器具,应知为‘刀杖’。然而比丘们手持剪刀、牙签或胡椒粒而行,并非为了伤害他人,因此,仍称为放下棍棒、放下刀杖。‘有惭’是指具足以厌恶恶行为相的惭。‘具足悲悯’是指具足悲悯、慈心。‘怜悯一切众生’是指以利益怜悯一切众生,即由于具足悲悯,而对一切众生有利益心的意思。‘住’是指行持、护持。显示巴利原文
178.Bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpannoti yā bhikkhūnaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā, tañca. Yattha cete saha jīvanti, ekajīvikā sabhāgavuttino honti, taṃ bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadasaṅkhātaṃ sājīvañca. Tattha sikkhanabhāvena samāpannoti bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno. Samāpannoti sikkhaṃ paripūrento sājīvañca avītikkamanto hutvā tadubhayaṃ upagatoti attho. Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyātiādīsu pāṇātipātādikathā heṭṭhā vitthāritā eva. Pahāyāti imaṃ pāṇātipātacetanāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ pajahitvā. Paṭivirato hotīti pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya tato dussīlyato orato viratova hoti. Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasatthoti parūpaghātatthāya daṇḍaṃ vā satthaṃ vā ādāya avattanato nikkhittadaṇḍo ceva nikkhittasattho cāti attho. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ, sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇaṃ sattānaṃ vināsanabhāvato ‘sattha’nti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhavāsiṃ vā pipphalikaṃ vā gahetvā vicaranti, na taṃ parūpaghātatthāya. Tasmā nihitadaṇḍā nihitasatthātveva saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Lajjīti pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgato. Dayāpannoti dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno. Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako. Tāya dayāpannatāya sabbesaṃ pāṇabhūtānaṃ hitacittakoti attho. Viharatīti iriyati, pāleti.
‘只取所与’是指只取所给予之物。‘心也只期望所与’是指内心也只期望所给予之物。‘盗’是指偷盗。不是以偷盗的方式。正因为不偷盗,而是以清净的方式;以自身,即以自己的身体。即以此清净的身体而住,这是所说的意思。显示巴利原文
Dinnameva ādiyatīti dinnādāyī. Cittenapi dinnameva paṭikaṅkhatīti dinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Thenetīti theno. Na thenena athenena. Athenattāyeva sucibhūtena. Attanāti attabhāvena. Athenaṃ sucibhūtaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“非梵行”即非殊胜行。行殊胜、最上之行者,名为梵行者。“远离行者”意为远离非梵行者。“淫欲”:因被贪欲缠缚,由与相似众生交合而得名,故称淫欲,是不正法。“村法”即村民之法。显示巴利原文
Abrahmacariyanti aseṭṭhacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratīti brahmacārī. Ārācārīti abrahmacariyato dūracārī. Methunāti rāgapariyuṭṭhānavasena sadisattā methunakāti laddhavohārehi paṭisevitabbato methunāti saṅkhaṃ gatā asaddhammā. Gāmadhammāti gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammā.
说真实者,名为真实语者。以真实连贯真实、令真实契合,名为真实连贯者,意思是不会间杂妄语。若有人时而说妄语,时而说真实,则由妄语间断之故,其真实不能与真实连贯,因此不称为真实连贯者。而此人并非如此,即使为活命也不说妄语,唯以真实连贯真实,故为真实连贯者。“Theto”意为坚固,即言语坚固。有一种人,如同姜黄之色,如插在灰堆中的木桩,如放在马背上的葫芦,言语不坚固。另一种人,犹如石刻,如同因陀罗柱,言语坚固。纵被刀砍头,也不说两种话。此人名为坚固者。“Paccayiko”意为可信赖者,即值得相信。有一种人不可信赖,当被问“这是谁说的?是某某说的”时,便落得“不要相信他的话”这样的评价。另一种人则可信赖,当被问“这是谁说的?是某某说的”时,便得到“如果是他说的,这便是标准,如今不必再考察,就是这样”的评价。此人名为可信赖者。不欺诳世间者,即以此真实语之行而不欺诳世间。显示巴利原文
Saccaṃ vadatīti saccavādī. Saccena saccaṃ sandahati ghaṭetīti saccasandho. Na antarantarā musā vadatīti attho. Yo hi puriso kadāci musā vadati, kadāci saccaṃ, tassa musāvādena antaritattā saccaṃ saccena na ghaṭīyati, tasmā na so saccasandho. Ayaṃ pana na tādiso. Jīvitahetupi musā avatvā saccena saccaṃ sandahatiyevāti saccasandho. Thetoti thiro, thirakathoti attho. Eko hi puggalo haliddirāgo viya, thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇuko viya, assapiṭṭhe ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍamiva ca, na thirakatho hoti. Eko pāsāṇalekhā viya, indakhīlo viya ca thirakatho hoti. Asinā sīse chindantepi dve kathā na katheti. Ayaṃ vuccati theto. Paccayikoti pattiyāyitabbako, saddhāyikoti attho. Ekacco hi puggalo na paccayiko hoti. ‘Idaṃ kena vuttaṃ? Asukenā’ti vutte ‘mā tassa vacanaṃ saddahathā’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Eko paccayiko hoti. ‘Idaṃ kena vuttaṃ? Asukenā’ti vutte ‘yadi tena vuttaṃ, idameva pamāṇaṃ, idāni upaparikkhitabbaṃ natthi, evameva ida’nti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Ayaṃ vuccati paccayiko. Avisaṃvādako lokassāti tāya saccavāditāya lokaṃ na visaṃvādetīti attho.
“为了分裂他们”:即为了分裂那些“从这里听闻”而宣说者,从他们那里听闻后,意在行分裂。“已分裂者的和合者”:若两位朋友或同师等,因某种原因而分裂,他便一一趋近,说:“你们生于这样的家族,如此多闻,这样做并不合适”等语,从而促成和合。“随助者”:即和合的随助者,见到两人和合后,说:“你们生于这样的家族,具足这样的功德,这是适合你们的”等语,使和合坚固,这是其义。“以和合为乐者”:即和合乐者,意指若无和合,他连住都不愿意。亦有“和合乐者”的异本,义同。“和合喜者”:即乐于和合者,意指舍弃他们后,他连去往别处都不愿意。“和合欢喜者”:见到和合、听到和合便心生欢喜。“说作和合之语者”:哪种言语能使众生和合,他便宣说赞叹和合功德的言语,不说其他。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃbhedāyāti yesaṃ ito sutvāti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ, tesaṃ bhedāya. Bhinnānaṃ vā sandhātāti dvinnaṃ mittānaṃ vā samānupajjhāyakādīnaṃ vā kenacideva kāraṇena bhinnānaṃ ekamekaṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘tumhākaṃ īdise kule jātānaṃ, evaṃ bahussutānaṃ idaṃ na yutta’ntiādīni vatvā sandhānaṃ kattā. Anuppadātāti sandhānānuppadātā. Dve jane samagge disvā – ‘tumhākaṃ evarūpe kule jātānaṃ, evarūpehi guṇehi samannāgatānaṃ anucchavikameta’ntiādīni vatvā daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho. Samaggo ārāmo assāti samaggārāmo. Yattha samaggā natthi, tattha vasitumpi na icchatīti attho. Samaggarāmotipi pāḷi. Ayameva attho. Samaggaratoti samaggesu rato. Te pahāya aññatra gantumpi na icchatīti attho. Samagge disvāpi sutvāpi nandatīti samagganandī. Samaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti yā vācā satte samaggeyeva karoti, taṃ sāmaggīguṇaparidīpakameva vācaṃ bhāsati, na itaranti.
于适宜之时而说者,名为适时语者,意谓观察合宜的时机而后说。说真实、如实、符合法性者,名为真实语者。唯依现世利与来世利而说者,名为义利语者。唯依九种出世间法而说者,名为法语者。唯依防护律仪与断除律仪而说者,名为律语者。藏处,即安放之处;有藏处者,意为具足藏处者,是说应安藏于心中的语言。适时,即虽然说着这样的语言,但不会怀着“我要说有藏处的语言”之心而于不当时机说,乃观察合宜的时机后而说,这是其意。有譬喻者,即带有譬喻、带有理由。有边际者,即显示界限,意为令界限明了而说。义利相应者,由于以种种方式分析亦无法穷尽,故说为具足义利的语言;或那位义利语者所说的义利,因与彼义利相应,故称为义利相应的语言。并非放下一个而另说一个,此为所说之意。显示巴利原文
Kālena vadatīti kālavādī. Vattabbayuttakālaṃ sallakkhetvā vadatīti attho. Bhūtaṃ tathaṃ tacchaṃ sabhāvameva vadatīti bhūtavādī. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthasannissitameva katvā vadatīti atthavādī. Navalokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti dhammavādī. Saṃvaravinayapahānavinayasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti vinayavādī. Nidhānaṃ vuccati ṭhapanokāso. Nidhānamassa atthīti nidhānavatī. Hadaye nidhātabbayuttakaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti attho. Kālenāti evarūpiṃ bhāsamānopi ca ‘‘ahaṃ nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsissāmī’’ti na akālena bhāsati. Yuttakālaṃ pana sallakkhetvāva bhāsatīti attho. Sāpadesanti saupamaṃ, sakāraṇanti attho. Pariyantavatinti paricchedaṃ dassetvā. Yathāssā paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatīti attho. Atthasaṃhitanti anekehipi nayehi vibhajantena pariyādātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya atthasampannaṃ bhāsati. Yaṃ vā so atthavādī atthaṃ vadati, tena atthena saṃhitattā atthasaṃhitaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati. Na aññaṃ nikkhipitvā aññaṃ bhāsatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
179 远离损害种子类与生物类,即远离五种种子类——根种、茎种、节种、顶种、种子种,以及任何青草、树木等生物类的损害,意为远离以切割、破坏、烧煮等方式进行的摧残。一食者,即早餐与晚餐两种食事。其中,早餐限于正午之前,另一种从正午后至黎明前,因此即使在正午前吃十次,也仍是一食者,就此而说“一食者”。夜晚的进食为夜食,从此远离者为离夜食者。超过正午直至日落之间的进食,称为非时食,因远离此故,为离非时食者。与教法不合而成为障碍的观看,为观看障碍。以自己跳舞、令人跳舞等方式,舞蹈、歌唱、音乐,乃至以令孔雀舞等方式而发生的舞蹈等,这些障碍的观看,为观看舞蹈、歌唱、音乐等障碍。因为舞蹈等,无论是自己进行,或令他人进行,或是适宜观看,对比丘、比丘尼都不适宜。花鬘等中,花鬘即任何花,香即任何香料,涂香即令皮肤着色之物。其中,佩戴者称为持,填补不足处者称为装饰,以香和肤色而受用者称为庄严。处即原因,因此凡以恶戒之心,大众进行那些戴花鬘等事,从此远离,这是其意。高床即超过尺寸者,大床即不适宜的铺设,从此远离,这是其意。显示巴利原文
179.Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhāti mūlabījaṃ, khandhabījaṃ, phaḷubījaṃ, aggabījaṃ bījabījanti pañcavidhassa bījagāmassa ceva yassa kassaci nīlatiṇarukkhādikassa bhūtagāmassa ca samārambhā. Chedanabhedanapacanādibhāvena vikopanā paṭiviratoti attho. Ekabhattikoti pātarāsabhattaṃ, sāyamāsabhattanti dve bhattāni. Tesu pātarāsabhattaṃ antomajjhanhikena paricchinnaṃ. Itaraṃ majjhanhikato uddhaṃ antoaruṇena. Tasmā antomajjhanhike dasakkhattuṃ bhuñjamānopi ekabhattikova hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ekabhattikoti. Rattiyā bhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatoti rattūparato. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyasatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma, tato viratattā virato vikālabhojanā. Sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca antamaso mayūranaccanāpanādivasenapi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā cāti naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā. Naccādīni hi attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā yuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭanti. Mālādīsu – mālāti yaṃkiñci pupphaṃ. Gandhanti yaṃkiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Tattha piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma. Ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma. Gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāma. Ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ. Tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, tato paṭiviratoti attho. Uccāsayanaṃ vuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ. Mahāsayanaṃ akappiyasanthataṃ, tato paṭiviratoti attho. Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo, lohamāsako, jatumāsako, dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti. Tassa ubhayassāpi paṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato, neva naṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatīti attho.
“接受生谷”指接受七种生谷,即稻米、稻谷、大麦、小麦、黍米、稗子、穇子。不仅接受这些谷物,比丘连触碰也不允许。“接受生肉”在此指,除了特别允许的情况外,比丘接受生的鱼肉是不允许的,但触碰并非不允许。“接受妇女与少女”在此,“妇女”指已与男子交往者,其余称为“少女”。接受她们以及触碰她们,皆不如法。“接受奴仆”在此,仅就奴仆本身而言,接受他们是不允许的;但若说“我给予净人”、“我给予园丁”,则是允许的。关于山羊、绵羊等,乃至田地、地基等,如法与不如法的判定方式,应依律藏来审察。其中,“田”指生长谷类作物之处,“地基”指生长豆类等作物之处,或者两者都生长之处称为“田”,为种植而尚未开垦的土地称为“地基”。此处以田地、地基为代表,池塘、水库等也包括在内。显示巴利原文
Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇāti sālivīhiyavagodhumakaṅguvarakakudrūsakasaṅkhātassa sattavidhassāpi āmakadhaññassa paṭiggahaṇā. Na kevalañca etesaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva, āmasanampi bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha aññatra odissa anuññātā āmakamacchamaṃsānaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭati, no āmasanaṃ. Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha itthīti purisantaragatā. Itarā kumārikā nāma. Tāsaṃ paṭiggahaṇampi āmasanampi akappiyameva. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha dāsidāsavaseneva tesaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘Kappiyakārakaṃ dammi’, ‘ārāmikaṃ dammī’ti evaṃ vutte pana vaṭṭati. Ajeḷakādīsupi khettavatthupariyosānesu kappiyākappiyanayo vinayavasena upaparikkhitabbo. Tattha khettaṃ nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Yattha vā ubhayampi ruhati taṃ khettaṃ. Tadatthāya akatabhūmibhāgo vatthu. Khettavatthusīsena cettha vāpitaḷākādīnipi saṅgahitāneva.
“信使”指信使的工作,即携带在家人委托的信件或口信,往各处奔走。“被差遣”指被派去他家的短程行走。“随从”指从事这两类事务。因此,此处应理解为“信使、被差遣、随从”的意思。“买卖”即买和卖。关于“秤欺”等——“欺”是欺骗的意思。其中,“秤欺”有四种:形欺、肢欺、执欺、覆欺。其中,“形欺”指将两个秤做成相同形状,收进时用大秤,给出时用小秤。“肢欺”指收进时用手按压秤的后部,给出时按压前部。“执欺”指收进时握持秤绳的根部,给出时握持顶端。“覆欺”指将秤杆掏空,内部填入铁粉,收进时将有铁粉的一端放在后部,给出时放在前部。显示巴利原文
Dūteyyaṃ vuccati dūtakammaṃ. Gihīnaṃ pahitaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ . Pahīṇagamanaṃ vuccati paragharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ. Anuyogo nāma tadubhayakaraṇaṃ. Tasmā dūteyyapahīṇagamanānaṃ anugoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kayavikkayāti kayā ca vikkayā ca. Tulākūṭādīsu – kūṭanti vañcanaṃ. Tattha tulākūṭaṃ nāma rūpakūṭaṃ, aṅgakūṭaṃ gahaṇakūṭaṃ, paṭicchannakūṭanti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha rūpakūṭaṃ nāma dve tulā samarūpā katvā gaṇhanto mahatiyā gaṇhāti, dadanto khuddikāya deti. Aṅgakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto pacchābhāge hatthena tulaṃ akkamati, dadanto pubbabhāge. Gahaṇakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto mūle rajjuṃ gaṇhāti, dadanto agge. Paṭicchannakūṭaṃ nāma tulaṃ susiraṃ katvā anto ayacuṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhanto taṃ pacchābhāge karoti, dadanto aggabhāge.
“铜器”指金钵。以此行骗,名为“铜器欺”。如何行骗?先制作一个金钵,再将另外两三个铜钵染成金色。然后前往某地,进入某富裕人家,说“请买金器”。当被问及价格时,他们表示愿以更便宜的价格出售。随后,当对方问“如何能知这些是金的”时,他们回答“你们检验后再取”,于是将金钵在石上摩擦,然后把所有钵都交给对方后离去。显示巴利原文
Kaṃso vuccati suvaṇṇapāti. Tāya vañcanaṃ kaṃsakūṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ katvā aññā dve tisso lohapātiyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇā karonti, tato janapadaṃ gantvā kiñcideva aḍḍhakulaṃ pavisitvā suvaṇṇabhājanāni kiṇathā’ti vatvā agghe pucchite samagghataraṃ dātukāmā honti. Tato tehi ‘kathaṃ imesaṃ suvaṇṇabhāvo jānitabbo’ti vutte ‘vīmaṃsitvā gaṇhathā’ti suvaṇṇapātiṃ pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā sabbapātiyo datvā gacchanti.
“量欺”有三种:心破、顶破、绳破。其中,“心破”发生在量取酥油、油等时。收进时,用底部有孔的量器,说“慢慢倒”,让大量液体漏入下方容器而收进;给出时,则堵住孔,快速装满后给出。“顶破”发生在量取芝麻、米等时。收进时,慢慢将顶部堆高而收进;给出时,快速装满并削平顶部后给出。“绳破”发生在丈量田地、地基时。未得贿赂者,丈量时会将不大的田地量成大的。显示巴利原文
Mānakūṭaṃ nāma hadayabhedasikhābhedarajjubhedavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha hadayabhedo sappitelādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto heṭṭhā chiddena mānena ‘saṇikaṃ āsiñcā’ti vatvā antobhājane bahuṃ paggharāpetvā gaṇhāti. Dadanto chiddaṃ pidhāya sīghaṃ pūretvā deti. Sikhābhedo tilataṇḍulādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto saṇikaṃ sikhaṃ ussāpetvā gaṇhāti. Dadanto vegena pūretvā sikhaṃ chindanto deti. Rajjubhedo khettavatthuminanakāle labbhati. Lañjaṃ alabhantā hi khettaṃ amahantampi mahantaṃ katvā minanti.
关于“敲诈等”——“敲诈”指为了将无主之物说成有主而收受贿赂。“欺骗”指以种种手段骗惑他人。这里有一则事例:据说有个猎人捕获了一只鹿和一只小鹿回来。一个骗子问他:“喂,鹿值多少钱?小鹿值多少钱?”猎人答:“鹿值两迦哈波那,小鹿值一迦哈波那。”骗子便付了一迦哈波那,拿走小鹿,走出一小段路后又折返,说道:“喂,我不要小鹿了,把鹿给我吧。”猎人说:“那你得给我两迦哈波那。”骗子说:“喂,我不是先给了一迦哈波那吗?”猎人承认:“是,给了。”骗子便说:“那我把小鹿还给你,这么一来,那一迦哈波那加上这只值一迦哈波那的小鹿,正好是两迦哈波那。”猎人觉得“他说得有理”,于是收回小鹿,把鹿给了他。显示巴利原文
Ukkoṭanādīsu – ukkoṭananti assāmike sāmike kātuṃ lañjaggahaṇaṃ. Vañcananti tehi tehi upāyehi paresaṃ vañcanaṃ. Tatridamekaṃ vatthu – eko kira luddako migañca migapotakañca gahetvā āgacchati. Tameko dhutto – ‘‘kiṃ bho migo agghati, kiṃ migapotako’’ti āha. ‘‘Migo dve kahāpaṇe, migapotako eka’’nti ca vutte kahāpaṇaṃ datvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ gantvā nivatto , ‘‘na me bho migapotakena attho, migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha. Tena hi ‘‘dve kahāpaṇe dehī’’ti. So āha – ‘‘nanu te, bho, mayā paṭhamaṃ eko kahāpaṇo dinno’’ti? ‘‘Āma dinno’’ti. Idampi migapotakaṃ gaṇha, evaṃ so ca kahāpaṇo ayañca kahāpaṇagghaṇako migapotakoti dve kahāpaṇā bhavissantīti. So ‘‘kāraṇaṃ vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā migaṃ adāsīti.
“欺诈”指通过诡计或幻术,将非装饰品说成装饰品,将非宝石说成宝石,将非金说成金,以伪冒之物进行欺骗。“曲行”即邪曲不正的行为。这是对上述敲诈等行为的统称。因此,这里应理解为“敲诈曲行、欺骗曲行、欺诈曲行”的意思。有些人将“展示一物而交付另一物”称为“曲行”,但这已包含在“欺骗”之中。显示巴利原文
Nikatīti yogavasena vā māyāvasena vā apāmaṅgaṃ pāmaṅganti, amaṇiṃ maṇīti, asuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇanti katvā patirūpakena vañcanaṃ. Sāciyogoti kuṭilayogo. Etesaṃyeva ukkoṭanādīnametaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā ukkoṭanasāciyogo vañcanasāciyogo nikatisāciyogoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Keci aññaṃ dassetvā aññassa parivattanaṃ ‘sāciyogo’ti vadanti. Taṃ pana vañcaneneva saṅgahitaṃ.
关于“砍断等”——“砍断”指砍断手掌等肢体。“杀”指杀害。“缚”指以绳索等捆绑。“掠夺”有两种:雪中掠夺与丛林掠夺。在降雪时节,借雪隐蔽而劫掠行路之人,这称为雪中掠夺;借丛林等隐蔽而劫掠,则称为丛林掠夺。“抢劫”指对村庄、城镇等进行洗劫。“暴力行为”指凶暴的手段,即闯入人家,将刀抵在人们胸口,强行夺取所爱之物。如此,他便远离了砍断……乃至暴力行为。显示巴利原文
Chedanādīsu – chedananti hatthacchedanādi. Vadhoti māraṇaṃ. Bandhoti rajjubandhanādīhi bandhanaṃ. Viparāmosoti himaviparāmoso, gumbaviparāmosoti duvidho. Yañhi himapātasamaye himena paṭicchannā hutvā maggappaṭipannaṃ janaṃ musanti, ayaṃ himaviparāmoso. Yaṃ gumbādīhi paṭicchannā musanti, ayaṃ gumbaviparāmoso. Ālopo vuccati gāmanigamādīnaṃ vilopakaraṇaṃ. Sahasākāroti sāhasikakiriyā. Gehaṃ pavisitvā manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitabhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ. Evametasmā chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
180 他是一位知足者:对于四种资具,他以十二种方式具足随所得而安住的知足。以护持此身:仅以维持身体所需之物。以护持此腹:仅以维持腹部所需之物。他持取后便离去:比丘持取所有八种资具,将其随身系带后便离去。他对于‘这是我的寺院、这是我的周边区域、这是我的侍者’等,不怀丝毫执著或系缚。如同离弦之箭脱离箭囊,又如离群之象,随其所宜,受用于住处、林丛、树下、山林、石窟。他独自站立,独自安坐,于一切威仪中独处无伴,无有第二者。显示巴利原文
180.So santuṭṭho hotīti so catūsu paccayesu dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato hoti. Kāyaparihārikenāti kāyaṃ pariharaṇamattakena. Kucchiparihārikenāti kucchipariharaṇamattakena. Samādāyeva pakkamatīti aṭṭhavidhaṃ bhikkhu parikkhāramattakaṃ sabbaṃ gahetvāva kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāva gacchati. ‘‘Mama vihāro pariveṇaṃ upaṭṭhāko’’ti saṅgo vā baddho vā na hoti. So jiyā muttasaro viya yūthā pakkanto, mattahatthī viya icchiticchitaṃ senāsanaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ vanapatthaṃ pabbhāraṃ paribhuñjanto ekova tiṭṭhati, ekova nisīdati. Sabbiriyāpathesu ekova adutiyo.
“于四方无碍,且无嗔恚,
“随所得而常怀知足;”
于诸危难中安忍无畏,
应如犀牛角一般,独自游行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti, Santussamāno itarītarena; Parissayānaṃ sahitā achambhī, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 42);
如此成就了所述如犀牛角般的独行境界。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ khaggavisāṇakappataṃ āpajjati.
现在,以譬喻阐明其义,说“譬如”等语。其中,“有翼者”指鸟,即具翅膀的鸟。“飞”指飞起。此处略义为:所谓鸟,知晓“某处有树果实成熟”后,便从各方飞来,以爪、翼、喙等刺穿、抖落其果实而食。它们不会想“这是今天的,那是明天的”。当果实耗尽后,它们既不为树设置守护,也不在那里留下羽毛、爪或喙。随后,它们对那棵树无所顾恋,随心所欲飞向各处,各自负翼而去。同样地,此比丘无系着、无顾恋地离去,故说“持取后便离去”。“以圣者”指以无过失者。“内”指自身之中。“无过患之乐”指无过失之乐。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento, ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ḍetīti uppatati. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – sakuṇo nāma ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese rukkho paripakkaphalo’’ti ñatvā nānādisāhi āgantvā nakhapakkhatuṇḍādīhi tassa phalāni vijjhantā vidhunantā khādanti. ‘‘Idaṃ ajjatanāya, idaṃ svātanāya bhavissatī’’ti tesaṃ na hoti. Phale pana khīṇe neva rukkhassa ārakkhaṃ ṭhapenti, na tattha pattaṃ vā nakhaṃ vā tuṇḍaṃ vā ṭhapenti. Atha kho tasmiṃ rukkhe anapekkho hutvā yo yaṃ disābhāgaṃ icchati, so tena sapattabhārova uppatitvā gacchati. Evameva ayaṃ bhikkhu nissaṅgo nirapekkhoyeva pakkamati, tena vuttaṃ samādāyeva pakkamatīti. Ariyenāti niddosena. Ajjhattanti sake attabhāve. Anavajjasukhanti niddosasukhaṃ.
181 “他以眼见色后”:这位具足此圣戒蕴的比丘,以眼识见色后,这是其义。其余语句中应说之义,皆如前文所述。“无染之乐”指不被烦恼所染污之乐,也称“无散乱之乐”。因为根律仪之乐,于所见等中唯以所见等而转起,故为无散乱。显示巴利原文
181.So cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti so iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato bhikkhu cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ passitvāti attho. Sesapadesupi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Abyāsekasukhanti kilesehi anavasittasukhaṃ. Avikiṇṇasukhantipi vuttaṃ. Indriyasaṃvarasukhañhi diṭṭhādīsu diṭṭhamattādivasena pavattatāya avikiṇṇaṃ hoti.
182 “他于前进、返回时”:这位具足包括意根在内的六根防护的比丘,于前进、返回等七种场合,以正念正知而为正知而行者。其中应说之义,皆如《分别论·禅那分别》所述。显示巴利原文
182.Soabhikkante paṭikkanteti so manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ saṃvarena samannāgato bhikkhu imesu abhikkantapaṭikkantādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññavasena sampajānakārī hoti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ jhānavibhaṅge vuttameva.
“他以此……”等语,是要说明什么?是要说明林住者的资具成就。因为若缺乏这四种资具,他的林住便不能成就,就会沦为与畜生或林中野人共语的地步。林中天神会发出恐怖之声:“这样的恶比丘住在林中有什么用?”并用手拍打头部,作出逃走的样子。恶名便会传开:“某比丘进入森林后,作了这样那样的恶行。”然而,若这四种资具具足,他的林住便能成就。因为他省察自己的戒时,不见任何污点与瑕疵,便生起喜悦;从坏灭、衰灭的角度观照它,便进入圣者之境。林中的天众心生欢喜,称赞其德。他的名声如同滴入水中的油滴般扩散开来。“远离”等词的意义如前所述。“他这样心得定……乃至……了知随业而趣的众生”:此处应说的义理,皆如《清净道论》中所说。显示巴利原文
So iminā cātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Araññavāsassa paccayasampattiṃ dasseti. Yassa hi ime cattāro paccayā natthi , tassa araññavāso na ijjhati, tiracchānagatehi vā vanacarakehi vā saddhiṃ vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā ‘‘kiṃ evarūpassa pāpabhikkhuno araññavāsenā’’ti bheravaṃ saddaṃ sāventi. Hatthehi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāyanākāraṃ karonti . ‘‘Asuko bhikkhu araññaṃ pavisitvā idañcidañca pāpakammaṃ akāsī’’ti ayaso pattharati. Yassa panete cattāro paccayā atthi, tassa araññavāso ijjhati. So hi attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhanto kiñci kāḷakaṃ vā tilakaṃ vā apassanto pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ khayato vayato sammasanto ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā attamanā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti. Itissa udake pakkhittatelabindu viya yaso vitthāriko hoti. Vivittantiādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva. So evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānātīti ettake ṭhāne yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva.
185 “他如此于心得定”:就第三明而言,应知此指作为观禅基础的第四禅心。“为了漏尽智”:即为了阿罗汉道智。因为阿罗汉道能灭尽诸漏,故称为漏尽。而此智属于彼道,故如此说。“将心导向”:指将观禅心导向。“他如实了知‘此是苦’”等:他以自相、共相的通达,如实了知、通达所有苦谛:“苦仅有此量,无过于此。”他如实了知、通达:生起此苦的渴爱——此是苦集;此二者到达某处而灭尽,彼处即它们的无转起、涅槃——此是苦灭;以及能证得彼的圣道——此是导向苦灭之行。应以自相、共相的通达而如实了知、通达——应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
185. Tatiyavijjāya so evaṃ samāhite citteti vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti arahattamaggañāṇatthāya. Arahattamaggo hi āsavānaṃ vināsanato āsavānaṃ khayoti vuccati. Tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ tappariyāpannattāti. Cittaṃ abhininnāmetīti vipassanācittaṃ abhinīharati. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu – ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇappaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, paṭivijjhati. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ – ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti; tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ – ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti; tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ – ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, paṭivijjhatīti – evamattho veditabbo.
如此从自性上显示了诸谛之后,现在为了从烦恼的角度以教说方式显示,而说“这些诸漏”等。对于他这样知、这样见者,即对于这样知、这样见的人,开示了与观智一起达到顶点的道。所谓“欲漏”,即从欲漏(解脱)。以“解脱”显示道刹那;以“已解脱”显示果刹那。因为在道刹那心解脱,在果刹那成为已解脱。以“于已解脱有‘已解脱’之智”显示省察智。以“生已尽”等显示他的阶位。因为他以彼智省察时,了知“生已尽”等。“已住”的意思是已出离、已遍住、已作、已行、已究竟。“梵行”指道梵行。因为凡夫善人与七位有学一起,称为住于梵行;漏尽者则是已出离住者。因此他省察自己的梵行住时,了知“梵行已住”。“应作已作”的意思是:对于四谛,通过四道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习的方式,十六种应作之事皆已究竟。因为凡夫善人等作彼事,而漏尽者是应作已作者。因此他省察自己的应作之事时,了知“应作已作”。“不再有如此状态”的意思是:了知“现在不再有为了如此状态、为了如此十六种事的状态、或为了烦恼灭尽而修习道的必要”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ime āsavātiādimāha. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃpassatoti tassa evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ katheti. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccatīti iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Vimuttasminti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Maggakkhaṇe hi cittaṃ vimuccati, phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ hoti. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dasseti. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena so paccavekkhanto ‘khīṇā jātī’tiādīni pajānāti. Vusitanti vuṭṭhaṃ parivuṭṭhaṃ kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma. Khīṇāsavo vuṭṭhavāso. Tasmā so attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto vusitaṃ brahmacariyanti pajānāti. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti; khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā so attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto. ‘‘Kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti pajānāti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti ‘‘idāni puna etthabhāvāya evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ natthī’’ti pajānāti.
186 “未断”是指:或以镇伏断、或以彼分断、或以正断,而未能断除。显示巴利原文
186. Sarāgādīsu – appahīnoti vikkhambhanappahānena vā tadaṅgappahānena vā samucchedappahānena vā appahīno.
187 “得者”指证得后安住于所得。“内心寂止”指在自身内、称为“内自”的心中所生起的寂止。“增上慧法观”指在称为增上慧的诸蕴法上,以无常等行相转起的观。“与色俱行”指以色相为所缘的色界等至。“与无色俱行”指不以色相为所缘的无色等至。于此,第一是八等至得者的凡夫;第二是干观圣弟子;第三是八等至得者的圣弟子;第四应知是世间大众。显示巴利原文
187.Lābhī hotītiādīsu – lābhīti lābhavā paṭilabhitvā ṭhito. Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathassāti niyakajjhattasaṅkhāte attano citte uppannassa cetosamathassa. Adhipaññādhammavipassanāyāti adhipaññāsaṅkhātāya khandhadhammesu aniccādivasena pavattāya vipassanāya. Rūpasahagatānanti rūpanimittārammaṇānaṃ rūpāvacarasamāpattīnaṃ. Arūpasahagatānanti na rūpanimittārammaṇānaṃ arūpasamāpattīnaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī puthujjano. Dutiyo sukkhavipassakaariyasāvako. Tatiyo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī ariyasāvako. Catuttho lokiyamahājano veditabbo.
188 “顺流者”指随顺轮回之流者,应知是沉没于轮回之流的凡夫。“逆流者”指逆流而行者,这是对不顺流而下、却逆流而行者的称呼。“亦不作恶业”指不违犯制戒而造作。“即使与苦俱、与忧俱”是说当烦恼现起时,与所生之苦忧一起而行。“圆满”指三学之中无一缺减。“清净”指无随烦恼。“梵行”指最胜行。以此方式,说了须陀洹与斯陀含。问:“那么,他们哭着行梵行吗?”答:“是的,他们以烦恼之哭而哭着行,名为行。”具戒的凡夫比丘也包含在其中。显示巴利原文
188. Anusotagāmīādīsu – anusotagāmīti vaṭṭasotaṃ anugato, vaṭṭasote nimuggo puthujjano veditabbo. Paṭisotagāmīti paṭisotagamano . Anusotaṃ agantvā paṭisotaṃ gacchantassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pāpañca kammaṃ na karotīti paññattaṃ vītikkamanto na karoti. Sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassenāti kilesapariyuṭṭhāne sati uppannena dukkhadomanassena saddhimpi. Paripuṇṇanti tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ ekāyapi anūnaṃ. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhacariyaṃ. Iminā vārena sotāpannasakadāgāmino kathitā. Kiṃ pana te rudantā brahmacariyaṃ carantīti? Āma. Kilesarodanena rudantā caranti nāma. Sīlasampanno puthujjanabhikkhupi ettheva saṅgahito.
所谓“立定”,是指具足坚定的本性。所谓“不再来者”,是指在欲、嗔的染污心不动摇,并且在此世界中不再退转的稳固状态。所谓“越过”,是指超越了渴爱之流。所谓“登彼岸”,是指到达涅槃这一彼岸境界。所谓“立于地”,是指在阿拉汉果位的成立之地上安住。所谓“心解脱”,是指获得果位的定境;所谓“慧解脱”,是指获得果证的智慧。这就是说:“断尽所有染污,超越彼岸,在果位稳立的婆罗门”即称之为婆罗门。因其远离外在的恶业故而被称为婆罗门。显示巴利原文
Ṭhitattoti ṭhitasabhāvo. Anāgāmīti kāmarāgabyāpādehi akampanīyacittatāya ca tamhā lokā anāvattidhammatāya ca ṭhitasabhāvo nāma. Tiṇṇoti taṇhāsotaṃ uttiṇṇo. Pāraṅgatoti nibbānapāraṃ gato. Thale tiṭṭhatīti arahattaphalasamāpattithale tiṭṭhati. Cetovimuttinti phalasamādhiṃ. Paññāvimuttinti phalañāṇaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ khīṇāsavo ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti vuccati. Bāhitapāpatāya hi esa brāhmaṇo nāma.
189 在“少闻”等句中:“少闻”指于九分教中仅稍有所闻。“未解义、未解法而法随法行”,指虽晓了义注和巴利圣典,却没有实践出世间法的随顺前行之道。依此理趣,一切处应知其义。显示巴利原文
189. Appassutādīsu – appakaṃ sutaṃ hotīti navaṅge satthusāsane kiñcideva thokaṃ sutaṃ hoti. Na atthamaññāya, na dhammamaññāya dhammānudhammapaṭipanno hotīti aṭṭhakathañca pāḷiñca jānitvā lokuttaradhammassa anurūpadhammaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno na hoti. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo.
190 190. 于不动沙门等中——“不动沙门”即沙门不动,“摩”字是连音词,意为不动摇的沙门、坚固的沙门。“此被称为”指此须陀洹因以生于教中的信而住立,故被称为“不动沙门”。斯陀含则因染着烦恼的存在,被称为“沙门红莲”,此处说红莲之义即红义。阿那含因无称为欲贪的染着烦恼,被称为“沙门白莲”,此处说白莲之义即白义。漏尽者则因无有令心僵硬之烦恼,于诸沙门中被称为“沙门柔软者”,且以少苦之义,此亦即是沙门柔软者。显示巴利原文
190. Samaṇamacalādīsu – samaṇamacaloti samaṇaacalo, makāro padasandhikaro. Niccalasamaṇo, thirasamaṇoti attho . Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ sotāpanno sāsane mūlajātāya saddhāya patiṭṭhitattā ‘samaṇamacalo’ti vuccati. Sakadāgāmī pana rajjanakilesassa atthitāya samaṇapadumoti vutto. Rattaṭṭho hi idha padumaṭṭho nāmāti vuttaṃ. Anāgāmī kāmarāgasaṅkhātassa rajjanakilesassa natthitāya samaṇapuṇḍarīkoti vutto. Paṇḍaraṭṭho hi idha puṇḍarīkaṭṭho nāmāti vuttaṃ . Khīṇāsavo ca thaddhabhāvakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena samaṇesu samaṇasukhumālo nāmāti vutto. Appadukkhaṭṭhenapi cesa samaṇasukhumāloyevāti.
5. 五法解说注释显示巴利原文
5. Pañcakaniddesavaṇṇanā
191 关于“五种人”——在此处,是指前面以“他既造作又追悔”等方式所举出的那些人。其中,所谓“那即是”,即指此人。“造作”一词,在此处用于业、行为、伤害、精进、破坏、犯戒等义。例如,该词在“凡任何苦的生起,一切皆以造作为缘”(《经集》748)中,指业;在“大祭祀、大造作,那些并无大果报”(《增支部》4.39)中,指行为;在“为了沙门乔达摩而杀害生命”(《中部》2.51-52)中,指伤害;在“应精进、应出离、应致力于佛陀的教法”(《相应部》1.185)中,指精进;在“他远离损害种子类和植物类”(《长部》1.10, 194;《中部》1.293)中,指破坏。然而,在“他既造作又追悔”(《增支部》5.142)这一句中,此词用于犯戒。因此,此处的“造作”指犯戒,意为:他既犯戒,又由此因缘而生起追悔。显示巴利原文
191. Pañcake – tatrāti tesu ‘‘ārabhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotī’’tiādinā nayena heṭṭhā uddiṭṭhapuggalesu. Yvāyanti yo ayaṃ. Ārabhatīti ettha ārambhasaddo kammakiriyāhiṃsanavīriyavikopanāpattivītikkamesu vattati. Tathā hesa ‘‘yaṃkiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti, sabbaṃ ārambhapaccayā’’ti (su. ni. 748) kamme āgato. ‘‘Mahāyaññā mahārambhā, na te honti mahapphalā’’ti (a. ni. 4.39) kiriyāyaṃ. ‘‘Samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ uddissa pāṇaṃ ārabhantī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.51-52) hiṃsane. ‘‘Ārabhatha, nikkhamatha, yuñjatha buddhasāsane’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.185) vīriye. ‘‘Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.10, 194; ma. ni. 1.293) vikopane. ‘‘Ārabhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.142) ayaṃ pana āpattivītikkame āgato. Tasmā āpattivītikkamavasena ārabhati ceva tappaccayā vippaṭisārī ca hotīti ayamettha attho.
“不如实了知”:因未证得,故不如其自性地了知。“于其处”:即于彼处,指此人证达的那个阶段,已生的诸恶不善法无余灭尽的意思。那么,证达什么阶段,那些法才灭尽呢?是阿罗汉道。不过,对于证果者,那些法才称为已灭尽。虽如此,应知此处是依道的作用而说果。“由造作而生”:指由犯戒而生。“由追悔而生”:指从追悔而生。“增长”:指通过一再地生起而增长。“善哉”:是恳请的善语。这是说:“即使尊者至今尚有违犯,尽管如此,我们仍恳请尊者:‘应当发露的,以发露;应当出罪的,以出罪;应当公开的,以公开;舍弃由造作而生的诸漏;以观察安住于清净之处,去除、驱除由追悔而生的诸漏后,应修习观的心与观的慧。’”“以此第五种人”:即就此第五种漏尽者而言。“将成为同等”:指以出世间功德而成为同等。这便是说,漏尽者应如此教诫。显示巴利原文
Yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti anadhigatattā yathāsabhāvato na jānāti. Yatthassāti yasmiṃ assa, yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā etassa puggalassa uppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantīti attho. Kiṃ pana patvā te nirujjhantīti? Arahattamaggaṃ. Phalappattassa pana niruddhā nāma honti. Evaṃ santepi idha maggakiccavasena phalameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ārambhajāti āpattivītikkamasambhavā. Vippaṭisārajāti vippaṭisārato jātā. Pavaḍḍhantīti punappunaṃ uppajjanena vaḍḍhanti. Sādhūti āyācanasādhu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yāva aparaddhañca vata āyasmatā, evaṃ santepi mayaṃ āyasmantaṃ yācāma – ‘‘desetabbayuttakassa desanāya, vuṭṭhātabbayuttakassa vuṭṭhānena, āvikātabbayuttakassa āvikiriyāya, ārambhaje āsave pahāya, suddhante ṭhitabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vippaṭisāraje āsave paṭivinodetvā nīharitvā vipassanācittañceva vipassanāpaññañca bhāvetū’’ti. Amunā pañcamena puggalenāti etena pañcamena khīṇāsavapuggalena. Samasamo bhavissatīti lokuttaraguṇehi samabhāveneva samo bhavissatīti evaṃ khīṇāsavena ovaditabboti attho.
“造作而不追悔”:指比丘犯戒后,为了出罪而寻求同分比丘,因此不追悔。《增支部注释》则说:“因为已出罪,所以不追悔。” “不造作而追悔”:指比丘虽不犯戒,但因不精通律制,于无犯处生起犯想,从而追悔。《增支部注释》则说:“曾犯一次戒,由此出罪后,虽不复犯,悔恨却不除。” “不造作亦不追悔”:指比丘既不犯戒,亦不追悔。那么,这是何种人呢?是舍弃精进者。因为他想:“我何必在此佛陀教法时期证入般涅槃?我将在未来弥勒正自觉者出世的时代入般涅槃。”如此,他即使戒行清净,也不修习行道。对于这样的人,应当如此教诫:“尊者为何放逸而住?凡夫的去处是不定的。尊者即使能得见弥勒正自觉者,也可能无法得见。因此,为了阿拉汉果,请修习观。”其余一切处,应依已述之方法了知。显示巴利原文
Ārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotīti āpattiṃ āpajjati. Taṃ pana desetuṃ sabhāgapuggalaṃ pariyesati. Tasmā na vippaṭisārī hoti. Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vuṭṭhitattā na vippaṭisārī hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na ārabhati vippaṭisārī hotīti āpattiṃ nāpajjati, vinayapaññattiyaṃ pana akovidattā anāpattiyaṃ āpattisaññī hutvā vippaṭisārī hoti. Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sakiṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya pacchā kiñcāpi nāpajjati, vippaṭisāraṃ pana vinodetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na ārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotīti neva āpattiṃ āpajjati, na vippaṭisārī hoti. Katamo panesa puggaloti? Ossaṭṭhavīriyapuggalo. So hi ‘‘kiṃ me imasmiṃ buddhakāle parinibbānena, anāgate metteyyasammāsambuddhakāle parinibbāyissāmī’’ti visuddhasīlopi paṭipattiṃ na pūreti. Sopi ‘‘kimatthaṃ āyasmā pamatto viharati puthujjanassa nāma gati anibaddhā. Āyasmā hi metteyyasammāsambuddhassa sammukhabhāvaṃ labheyyapi na labheyyāpīti arahattatthāya vipassanaṃ bhāvehī’’ti ovaditabbova. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
192 于“给予后而轻视”等情形中:有一位具大福德的比丘,常获四资具。他得到衣等物品后,便询问一位福薄比丘是否需要。那位比丘虽被一再询问,也还是接受。于是,这位比丘稍起嗔心,想让他感到羞愧,便说:“此人凭自身能力得不到衣等物,是依靠我们才得到的。”这样的人,名为“给予后而轻视”。另有一人与另一人同住两三年,起初对他恭敬,后来随着时间推移,不再恭敬,在其面前不起身,也不去侍奉。这样的人,名为“以共住而轻视”。显示巴利原文
192. Datvā avajānātītiādīsu – eko bhikkhu mahāpuñño catupaccayalābhī hoti. So cīvarādīni labhitvā aññaṃ appapuññaṃ āpucchati. Sopi tasmiṃ punappunaṃ āpucchantepi gaṇhātiyeva. Athassa itaro thokaṃ kupito hutvā maṅkubhāvaṃ uppādetukāmo vadati – ‘‘ayaṃ attano dhammatāya cīvarādīni na labhati, amhe nissāya labhatī’’ti. Evaṃ puggalo datvā avajānāti nāma. Eko pana ekena saddhiṃ dve tīṇi vassāni vasanto pubbe taṃ puggalaṃ garuṃ katvā pacchā gacchante gacchante kāle cittīkāraṃ na karoti, āsanāpi na vuṭṭhāti, upaṭṭhānampi na gacchati. Evaṃ puggalo saṃvāsena avajānāti nāma.
“初即信受之口”:意为从一开始便信受的口,即于第一句话便定论的口。“心倾向”:指有信仰。兹举其例:有一人,对于一位实为如法的比丘,却说“此人不如法”;他听闻后便以此作为定论。之后另有同分比丘说“此人如法”,他也不接受此人之言,而执取前一位比丘的话,说:“某位曾对我们说:‘此人不如法。’”又有一人,对于一位恶戒者,却说“此人持戒”;他相信了那人的话。之后另有比丘说:“此比丘不如法,不适合亲近你们。”他也不接受此言,只执取前者的话语。又有一人,听到赞叹便信受,听到毁谤也信受。此人也名为“初即信受之口”。“应信受之口”:指不论听闻什么,便在那上面定论其口的意思。显示巴利原文
Ādheyyamukhoti ādito dheyyamukho. Paṭhamavacanasmiṃyeva ṭhapitamukhoti attho. Adhimuccitā hotīti saddhātā hoti. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – eko puggalo sāruppaṃyeva bhikkhuṃ ‘asāruppo eso’ti katheti, taṃ sutvā esa niṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Puna aññena sabhāgena bhikkhunā ‘sāruppo aya’nti vuttepi tassa vacanaṃ na gaṇhāti ‘‘asukena nāma ‘asāruppo aya’nti amhākaṃ kathita’’nti purimabhikkhunova kathaṃ gaṇhāti. Aparopissa dussīlaṃ ‘sīlavā’ti katheti. Tassa vacanaṃ saddahitvā puna aññena ‘‘asāruppo esa bhikkhu, nāyaṃ tumhākaṃ santikaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ yutto’’ti vuttopi tassa vacanaṃ aggahetvā purimasseva kathaṃ gaṇhāti. Aparo vaṇṇampi kathitaṃ gaṇhāti, avaṇṇampi kathitaṃ gaṇhātiyeva. Ayampi ādheyyamukhoyeva nāma. Ādhātabbamukho yaṃ yaṃ suṇāti, tattha tattha ṭhapitamukhoti attho.
“动摇”:因信等心所仅暂住于一时,由不信等令其动摇,故称动摇。“少信”:指信薄弱、不圆满。其余诸词亦同此理。然依此中数数亲近之义,信即是爱敬。爱为信爱,亦包含世俗之爱。净信即信净。如是,所谓“人是动摇的”,即由少信等而称为动摇之人。恰如姜黄色、如谷堆中受捣击的木桩、如置于马背上的葫芦,其心无有定处,须臾生信,须臾瞋怒。显示巴利原文
Loloti saddhādīnaṃ ittarakālaṭṭhitikattā assaddhiyādīhi lulitabhāvena lolo. Ittarasaddhoti parittasaddho, aparipuṇṇasaddho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ettha pana punappunaṃ bhajanavasena saddhāva bhatti. Pemaṃ saddhāpemaṃ gehasitapemampi vaṭṭati. Pasādo saddhāpasādova. Evaṃ puggalo lolo hotīti evaṃ ittarasaddhāditāya puggalo lolo nāma hoti. Haliddirāgo viya , thusarāsimhi koṭṭitakhāṇuko viya, assapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍaṃ viya ca anibaddhaṭṭhāno muhuttena pasīdati, muhuttena kuppati.
“愚钝者”:依无智的状态而愚钝;“无明者”:依不清明的状态而无明。意为大愚痴者。显示巴利原文
Mando momūhoti aññāṇabhāvena mando avisadatāya momūho. Mahāmūḷhoti attho.
193 193. 于战士等譬喻中:“战士”,即以战争为生者。“尘聚”,指因象、马等足踏而地面破碎所扬起的尘团。“不能稳固”,指无法稳固地站立。“忍受尘聚”,指即使见彼尘团亦能忍耐。“旗顶”,指竖于象背、马背或车上的旗帜顶端。“喧噪”,指象、马、车等及军队的高声大叫。“在交战中”,指相遇时,即便微小的打击。“被杀伤”,指被困扰、遭受损害。“被破坏”,指遭受失败、失去常态。“忍受交战”,指即使遭受两三次打击亦能忍受、忍耐。“就在那战场之首”,即在那胜利营寨之处。“居住”,指征服后约住七日。何以故?为照料伤者之创口,并了知已作事者之殊胜而授与职位,以及享受统治之乐。显示巴利原文
193. Yodhājīvūpamesu – yodhājīvāti yuddhūpajīvino. Rajagganti hatthiassādīnaṃ pādappahārabhinnāya bhūmiyā uggataṃ rajakkhandhaṃ. Na santhambhatīti santhambhitvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Sahati rajagganti rajakkhandhaṃ disvāpi adhivāseti. Dhajagganti hatthiassādipiṭṭhesu vā rathesu vā ussāpitānaṃ dhajānaṃ aggaṃ. Ussāraṇanti hatthiassarathādīnañceva balakāyassa ca uccāsaddamahāsaddaṃ. Sampahāreti samāgate appamattakepi pahāre. Haññatīti vihaññati, vighātaṃ āpajjati. Byāpajjatīti vipattiṃ āpajjati, pakatibhāvaṃ jahati. Sahati sampahāranti dve tayo pahāre patvāpi sahati, adhivāseti . Tameva saṅgāmasīsanti tameva jayakhandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ. Ajjhāvasatīti sattāhamattaṃ abhibhavitvā āvasati. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Laddhappahārānaṃ pahārajagganatthañceva katakammānaṃ visesaṃ ñatvā ṭhānantaradānatthañca issariyasukhānubhavanatthañca.
194 194. 至此,由于导师与那些以战斗为生者已无交涉,然为在此教法中显明那类人的五种型态,故引此喻以为说明。因此,为令那些众生的形象得以彰显,方才宣说‘正是如此’等语。显示巴利原文
194. Idāni yasmā satthu yodhājīvehi kiccaṃ natthi, imasmiṃ pana sāsane tathārūpe pañca puggale dassetuṃ idaṃ opammaṃ ābhataṃ, tasmā te puggale dassento evamevantiādimāha.
其中,‘沉没’指陷入邪思惟中,没溺其中。‘不能守护梵行’指无法令梵行的修持持续无间、善加护持。‘显露学处的羸弱’,即是将于学处乏力的状态揭示出来。‘他的尘聚是何义?’这是问:所谓彼人的尘聚,所指为何?‘美丽’,指形貌端好。‘好看’,指值得瞻视。‘可爱’,指仅需一见便能令心澄净生信。‘以最上’即是以最殊胜者。‘以色身殊妙与肢体匀称’,即指以其身体肤色与肢体形态而言。显示巴利原文
Tattha saṃsīdatīti micchāvitakkasmiṃ visīdati, anupavisati. Na sakkoti brahmacariyaṃ sandhāretunti brahmacariyavāsaṃ anupacchijjamānaṃ gopetuṃ na sakkoti. Sikkhādubbalyaṃ āvikatvāti sikkhāya dubbalabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā. Kimassa rajaggasminti kiṃ tassa puggalassa rajaggaṃ nāmāti vadati. Abhirūpāti abhirūpavatī. Dassanīyāti dassanayoggā. Pāsādikāti dassaneneva cittappasādāvahā. Paramāyāti uttamāya. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti sarīravaṇṇena ceva aṅgasaṇṭhānena ca.
196 196. ‘嘲笑’,指出言轻蔑讥笑。‘大声说’,指放言高论。‘大笑’,指抚掌而发洪亮笑声。‘讥讽’,指以言语相激,出言嘲讽。显示巴利原文
196.Ūhasatīti avahasati. Ullapatīti katheti. Ujjagghatīti pāṇiṃ paharitvā mahāhasitaṃ hasati. Uppaṇḍetīti uppaṇḍanakathaṃ katheti.
197 197.“强行靠近而坐”:指制服后,在其近旁或同一座位上坐下。第二词同理。“压倒”:指覆盖。显示巴利原文
197.Abhinisīdatīti abhibhavitvā santike vā ekāsane vā nisīdati. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Ajjhottharatīti avattharati.
198 198.“解开、松脱”:从被抓握之处,将其手解开并松脱。此处其余之义显而易见。显示巴利原文
198.Viniveṭhetvā vinimocetvāti gahitaṭṭhānato tassa hatthaṃ viniveṭhetvā ceva, mocetvā ca. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
199 199. 关于乞食者:因愚钝、因无明——既不知受持,亦不知功德,仅因自己的愚钝与无明,以无知而成为乞食者。恶欲、被欲所败坏者——心想:“我是乞食者,人们会以四资具供养我,会以有惭、少欲等功德尊重我。”如此安住于恶欲,被那恶欲征服而成为乞食者。因疯狂而行乞者——因疯狂而心散乱,成为乞食者。因被称赞——心想:“此乞食支为诸佛与佛弟子所称赞、所赞叹。”因此成为乞食者。依止少欲等——心想:“我将成为少欲者,此乞食支将助成我的少欲;我将成为知足者,此乞食支将助成我的知足;我将削减烦恼,此乞食支将助成烦恼的削减。”因此成为乞食者。以此为需要——指以此善行实践为需要,或仅以此乞食为需要,即依止随所得而生活。最上:指最胜。其余是它的同义词。显示巴利原文
199. Piṇḍapātikesu – mandattā momūhattāti neva samādānaṃ jānāti, na ānisaṃsaṃ; attano pana mandattā momūhattā aññāṇeneva piṇḍapātiko hoti. Pāpiccho icchāpakatoti piṇḍapātikassa me sato ‘‘ayaṃ piṇḍapātiko’’ti catupaccayasakkāraṃ karissanti. Lajjī, appicchotiādīhi ca guṇehi sambhāvessantīti. Evaṃ pāpikāya icchāya ṭhatvā tāya pāpicchāya abhibhūto hutvā piṇḍapātiko hoti. Ummādavasena piṇḍāya caranto pana ummādā cittavikkhepā piṇḍapātiko nāma hoti. Vaṇṇitanti idaṃ piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ nāma buddhehi ca buddhasāvakehi ca vaṇṇitaṃ pasatthanti piṇḍapātiko hoti. Appicchataṃyeva nissāyātiādīsu – ‘‘iti appiccho bhavissāmi, idaṃ me piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ appicchatāya saṃvattissati; ‘iti santuṭṭho bhavissāmi idaṃ me piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattissati’; ‘iti kilese saṃlikhissāmi’, idaṃ me piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ kilesasallekhanatthāya saṃvattissatī’’ti piṇḍapātiko hoti. Idamatthitanti imāya kalyāṇāya paṭipattiyā atthikabhāvaṃ, iminā vā piṇḍapātamattena atthikabhāvaṃ. Yaṃ yaṃ laddhaṃ tena teneva yāpanabhāvaṃ nissāyāti attho. Aggoti jeṭṭhako. Sesāni tasseva vevacanāni.
“从牛得乳”,意思是乳因牛而有,无牛则无乳。“从乳得酪”等,也依同样道理。同样地,正如五种牛产品中以醍醐为最上,在这五种乞食者中,那位依止少欲等而行的乞食者,也是最上、最胜、最首、最妙、最殊胜的。然而,这五种乞食者中,只有两种是真正的乞食者,另外三种并非乞食者,仅依名称而被认为是乞食者。对于食后不食者等,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Gavā khīranti gāvito khīraṃ nāma hoti, na vinā gāviyā. Khīramhā dadhītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Evamevanti yathā etesu pañcasu gorasesu sappimaṇḍo aggo; evamevaṃ imesu pañcasu piṇḍapātikesu yvāyaṃ appicchatādīni nissāya piṇḍapātiko hoti. Ayaṃ aggo ca seṭṭho ca pāmokkho ca uttamo ca pavaro ca. Imesu pana pañcasu piṇḍapātikesu dveva janā piṇḍapātikā , tayo na piṇḍapātikā. Nāmamattena pana piṇḍapātikāti veditabbā. Khalupacchābhattikādīsupi eseva nayoti.
六法解说注释显示巴利原文
6. Chakkaniddesavaṇṇanā
202 202. 在六法中——“其中”,指在这六种人之中。“正自觉者应以此而见”,是说此人应被视作:以无师、自生的一切知智而成为一切知佛。显示巴利原文
202. Chakke – tatrāti tesu chasu puggalesu. Sammāsambuddho tena daṭṭhabboti so puggalo tena anācariyakena attanā uppāditena sabbaññutaññāṇena sabbaññubuddho daṭṭhabbo.
在“独觉者以此”等句中,指此人以独觉智而为独觉者;以声闻波罗蜜智,那些人即是舍利弗与目犍连;以苦之灭尽,那些人即是其余的阿拉汉;以不还来此状态,那人即是不还者;以还来此状态,那些人即被视为入流者与一来者。显示巴利原文
Paccekasambuddho tenātiādīsupi tena paccekasambodhiñāṇena so puggalo paccekasambuddho. Tena sāvakapāramīñāṇena te puggalā sāriputtamoggallānā. Tena dukkhassa antakaraṇena te puggalā avasesā arahanto. Tena itthattaṃ anāgamanena so puggalo anāgāmī. Tena itthattaṃ āgamanena te puggalā sotāpannasakadāgāmino daṭṭhabbāti.
《七法解说》注释显示巴利原文
7. Sattakaniddesavaṇṇanā
203 203. 在七法中——“一次沉没”指沉没一次。“以一向黑暗的”指以纯粹黑暗的,即称为无有说、无因说、无作说的决定邪见法。“如此之人”指出于此因,此人一次沉没,便即那样永远沉没。因为对此人而言,据说从后有中出离是不可能的。如同末伽梨瞿舍梨等,他们只是地狱火的食物。显示巴利原文
203. Sattake – sakiṃ nimuggoti ekavāraṃ nimuggo. Ekantakāḷakehīti ekanteneva kāḷakehi natthikavādaahetukavādaakiriyavādasaṅkhātehi niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammehi. Evaṃ puggaloti iminā kāraṇena puggalo ekavāraṃ nimuggo tathā nimuggova hoti. Etassa hi puna bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthīti vadanti. Makkhaligosālādayo viya heṭṭhā narakaggīnaṃyeva āhāro hoti.
“善哉!于善法有信心”——对善法有信心,名为“得善”,因此他能浮起。他仅凭这点善便称为浮起。“善哉!有惭”等语句,道理亦同。“唯退失”,如同行走处所泼洒的水,终将退失。“如是之人”,即是这样“善哉!有信心”的人。依凭这些信等善法,虽一度浮起,但因退失而又复沉没,例如提婆达多等人。提婆达多虽证得八定与五神通,然而因对诸佛生起害心,由此退失功德,造作出佛身血的恶业与破僧的恶业,于身坏命终后的第二心刹那,即坠入地狱。瞿迦梨迦因诽谤两位上首弟子,亦生于红莲地狱。显示巴利原文
Sāhu saddhā kusalesu dhammesūti kusaladhammesu saddhā nāma sādhuladdhikāti ummujjati. So tāvatakeneva kusalena ummujjati nāma. Sādhu hirītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Hāyatiyevāti caṅkavāre āsittaudakaṃ viya ekantena parihāyateva. Evaṃ puggaloti evaṃ sāhu saddhāti. Imesaṃ saddhādīnaṃ vasena ekavāraṃ ummujjitvā tesaṃ parihāniyā puna nimujjatiyeva, devadattādayo viya. Devadatto hi aṭṭha samāpattiyo, pañca ca abhiññāyo nibbattetvāpi puna buddhānaṃ paṭikaṇṭakatāya tehi guṇehi parihīno ruhiruppādakammaṃ saṅghabhedakammañca katvā kāyassa bhedā dutiyacittavārena niraye nibbatti. Kokāliko dve aggasāvake upavaditvā padumaniraye nibbatto.
“既不退失亦不增长”,意指资具匮乏时不会退失,资具充足时亦不会增长。无论在家还是出家,这两种情况都应加以说明。有的在家者,在资具匮乏时,会安排半月食、筹食或雨安居食;后来即便资具变得充足,他也仍然只维持半月食等分量。而出家者,在最初资具匮乏时,受持诵经分或头陀支;其后,即便因慧、力、精进具足而获得充足资具,他也不会再增修更多。如是之人,即是依凭这些信等善法安住,从沉没中浮起之后,名为“住立者”。显示巴利原文
Neva hāyati no vaḍḍhatīti appahonakakālepi na hāyati, pahonakakālepi na vaḍḍhati. Ubhayampi panetaṃ agārikenapi anagārikenapi dīpetabbaṃ. Ekacco hi agāriko appahonakakāle pakkhikabhattaṃ vā salākabhattaṃ vā vassāvāsikaṃ vā upanibandhāpeti. So pacchā pahonakakālepi pakkhikabhattādimattameva pavatteti. Anagārikopi ādimhi appahonakakāle uddesaṃ vā dhutaṅgaṃ vā gaṇhāti, medhābalavīriyasampattiyā pahonakakālepi tato uttariṃ na karoti. Evaṃ puggaloti evaṃ imāya saddhādīnaṃ ṭhitiyā puggalo ummujjitvā ṭhito nāma hoti.
“浮起后观察、眺望”,即须陀洹人,从沉没中起身之后,开始观察应走的道路和应去的方向。显示巴利原文
Ummujjitvā vipassati viloketīti sotāpanno puggalo uṭṭhahitvā gamanamaggaṃ gantabbaṃ disaṃ vā āloketi nāma.
“浮起后向前游”者,指斯陀含人,因烦恼微薄,从水中起身后,便朝向应行之处向前游。显示巴利原文
Ummujjitvāpataratīti sakadāgāmipuggalo kilesatanutāya uṭṭhahitvā gantabbadisābhimukho patarati nāma.
“得立足处”者,指阿那含人,起身、观察、向前游、行进后,于一处得安立,便止住不动,不再返回。显示巴利原文
Patigādhappatto hotīti anāgāmipuggalo uṭṭhāya viloketvā pataritvā gantvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne patiṭṭhāpatto nāma hoti, tiṭṭhati, na punāgacchati.
“已渡、到彼岸、立于陆地”者,指渡过一切烦恼之流,到达彼岸,名为立于涅槃陆地。这七类人,是以水中譬喻来阐明的。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhatīti sabbakilesoghaṃ taritvā paratīraṃ gantvā nibbānathale ṭhito nāma hoti. Ime pana satta puggalā udakopamena dīpitā.
据说有七位徒步商人,在远行途中遇到一条满水的河流。其中第一位是畏水之人,刚一下水便在入水处沉没,无法再起,就在水中成了鱼龟的食物。第二位在入水处沉没后,一度浮起,随即又沉没,无法再起,也在水中成了鱼龟的食物。第三位沉没后浮起,停在河中央,既不能回到此岸,也不能到达彼岸。第四位浮起后站定,眺望着渡口。第五位望见渡口便向前游去。第六位渡过河流到达彼岸,站在齐腰的浅水中。第七位到达彼岸后,用香粉等沐浴,穿上殊胜的衣服,涂抹妙香,佩戴青莲花等,以种种庄严装饰,然后进入大城,登上胜妙的楼阁,享用最上的饮食。显示巴利原文
Satta kira jaṅghavāṇijā addhānamaggapaṭipannā antarāmagge ekaṃ puṇṇanadiṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Tesu paṭhamaṃ otiṇṇo udakabhīruko puriso otiṇṇaṭṭhāneyeva nimujjitvā puna uṭṭhātuṃ nāsakkhi, antoyeva macchakacchapabhakkho jāto. Dutiyo otiṇṇaṭṭhāne nimujjitvā sakiṃ uṭṭhahitvā puna nimuggo uṭṭhātuṃ nāsakkhi, antoyeva macchakacchapabhakkho jāto. Tatiyo nimujjitvā uṭṭhahi. So majjhe nadiyā ṭhatvā neva orato āgantuṃ, na parato gantuṃ asakkhi . Catuttho uṭṭhāya ṭhito uttaraṇatitthaṃ olokesi. Pañcamo otaraṇatitthaṃ oloketvā patari. Chaṭṭho taritvā pārimatīraṃ gantvā kaṭippamāṇe udake ṭhito. Sattamo pārimatīraṃ gantvā gandhacuṇṇādīhi nhātvā varavatthāni nivāsetvā surabhivilepanaṃ vilimpitvā nīluppalādīni piḷandhitvā nānālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍito mahānagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādavaramāruyha uttamabhojanaṃ bhuñji.
其中,七位徒步商人比喻这七种人。河流比喻轮回。第一位畏水之人刚入水就沉没,如同邪见者沉没于轮回。沉没后一度浮起又沉没的人,比喻那些仅凭信心等善法生起而暂时浮出,却因退失而再次沉没的人。停在河中央的人,比喻凭借信心等而得以安住的人。眺望渡口的人,比喻正在观察道与果的须陀洹。向前游去的人,比喻因烦恼淡薄而向前迈进的斯陀含。渡过河后站在齐腰浅水中的人,比喻住立于不还果的阿那含。沐浴之后登上彼岸、站在陆地的人,比喻超越四瀑流、安立于涅槃之地的漏尽婆罗门。那立于陆地的人进入大城,登上胜妙的楼阁,享用最上饮食,应知这是比喻漏尽者以涅槃为所缘,进入果定而度过的时光。至于双分解脱等,前文已经阐明。显示巴利原文
Tattha satta jaṅghavāṇijā viya ime satta puggalā. Nadī viya vaṭṭaṃ. Paṭhamassa udakabhīrukassa purisassa otiṇṇaṭṭhāneyeva nimujjanaṃ viya micchādiṭṭhikassa vaṭṭe nimujjanaṃ. Ummujjitvā nimuggapuriso viya saddhādīnaṃ uppattimattakena ummujjitvā tesaṃ parihāniyā nimuggapuggalo. Majjhe nadiyā ṭhito viya saddhādīnaṃ ṭhitiyā ṭhitapuggalo. Uttaraṇatitthaṃ olokento viya gantabbamaggaṃ gantabbadisaṃ vā olokento sotāpanno. Pataritapuriso viya kilesatanutāya pataranto sakadāgāmī. Taritvā kaṭimatte udake ṭhitapuriso viya anāvattitadhammatāya ṭhito anāgāmī. Nhatvā pārimatīraṃ uttaritvā thale ṭhitapuriso viya cattāro oghe atikkamitvā nibbānathale ṭhito khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo. Thale ṭhitapurisassa nagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādavaraṃ āruyha uttamabhojanabhuñjanaṃ viya khīṇāsavassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā vītināmanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ubhatobhāgavimuttādayo heṭṭhā pakāsitāyevāti.
207 207. 对八种人与九种人的解说,也应当依照前文所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
207. Aṭṭhakanavakaniddesāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
10. 十者喻之注释解说显示巴利原文
10. Dasakaniddesavaṇṇanā
209 209. 在十者解说中——“此处”是指欲界地。于欲界地中,七返有等的究竟,就在这欲界地本身。以欲界有身证得阿罗汉,及证入无余依涅槃界,这便是此处的义涵。显示巴利原文
209. Dasakaniddese – idhāti kāmāvacarabhūmiyaṃ. Kāmāvacarabhūmiyañhi sattakkhattuparamādīnaṃ kāmāvacarabhūmiyaññeva niṭṭhā hoti. Kāmāvacarattabhāveneva arahattappatti ca anupādisesanibbānappatti ca hotīti attho.
“此处舍后”的意思,是说在此欲界有身舍弃之后,住于净居有身者的究竟,这便是其义。中般涅槃等类,即是在此处证得阿那含果,从此处没后,生于净居,依着那个有身而证得阿罗汉及无余依涅槃界。因此说:“此五种人,于此处舍后,得达究竟。”显示巴利原文
Idhavihāyāti idha kāmāvacare attabhāve vihāya suddhāvāsattabhāve ṭhitānaṃ niṭṭhā hotīti attho. Antarāparinibbāyiādayo hi idha anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā ito cutā suddhāvāsesu uppajjitvā tena attabhāvena arahattañceva anupādisesanibbānadhātuñca pāpuṇanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘imesaṃ pañcannaṃ idha vihāya niṭṭhā’’ti.
此《人施设论》,乃由世间无与伦比之师,
非仅略说,导师于三十三天宣说。
善为分别而不杂乱,于任何处之任何义,
从各处取其要义,舍弃过于冗长之处。
不取《清净道论》所说,而另为编纂;
此注疏,依非略非广之理趣而作。
他圆满成就的善法,即是那精微、吉祥的正法;
愿众生以清净法眼,观见这正法。
显示巴利原文 Yaṃ ve puggalapaññattiṃ, loke appaṭipuggalo; Nātisaṅkhepato satthā, desesi tidasālaye. Tassā aṭṭhakathañceva, dīpabhāsāya saṅkhataṃ; Āgamaṭṭhakathāyo ca, ogāhetvā asesato. Suvibhatto asaṃkiṇṇo, yo yo attho yahiṃ yahiṃ; Tato tato taṃ gahetvā, pahāya ativitthāraṃ. Visuddhimagge yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ anādāya saṅkhatā; Nātisaṅkhepavitthāra-nayenaṭṭhakathā ayaṃ. Taṃ etaṃ sattamattehi, bhāṇavārehi tantiyā; Ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ dhammassa, saṅkharontena yaṃ mayā. Sampattaṃ kusalaṃ tena, saddhammaṃ sukhumaṃ sivaṃ; Olokentu visuddhena, pāṇayo dhammacakkhunāti.
阿毗达摩藏显示巴利原文
Abhidhammapiṭake